Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (932.54 KB, 168 trang )
<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b> Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>INTRODUCTION AND REVISION</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- Review all of the knowledge of grade 11
- Know how to study and learn English 12
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: textbook, pictures, cassette, tape</b>
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
<b>Time Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’Activities</b>
Greeting, introduce, get acquaintance with the students
<b>A.Revision</b>
-elicit all of the knowledge and language skills of grade 11
1.Verbs tenses ( present simple, past simple, past progressive,
past perfect……….)
<b>I. HIỆN TẠI ĐƠN (Simple Present)</b>
Cách dùng
1. Diễn tả một thói quen hoặc một việc thường xuyên xảy ra ở
hiện tại.
Ex: - We come to school on time everyday. (Chúng tôi đi học
- My mother always gets up early. (Mẹ tôi luôn thức dậy sớm)
■ Dấu hiệu thì:
a. Cách dùng này thường có các trạng từ chỉ sự thường xun:
• rarely: ít khi • usually: thường
thường
• sometimes: đôi khi • seldom: hiếm khi
• never: khơng bao giờ • always: ln ln
• often: thường • occasionally: thỉnh thoảng
• hardly ever: hiếm khi • everyday: hàng ngày
b. Các kết cấu đi với every như:
• every week: hàng tuần
• every month: hàng tháng
2. Diễn tả một sự thật hiển nhiên, một chân lý
Ex: - The Sun rises in the East. (Mặt trời mọc ở phương đông)
- The Earth moves around the sun. (Trái đất xoay quanh mặt
trời)
3. Diễn tả sự thật tương đối bền vững
Ex: - Your sister speaks English well. (Chị của bạn nói tiếng
- Dick writes novel. (Dick viết tiểu thuyết)
- Children need love and affection. (Trẻ em cần tình yêu và
sự ấp ủ)
<b>II. HIỆN TẠI TIẾP DIỄN (Present Continuous)</b>
Hình thức Subject + am / is / are + V-ing
Cách dùng
1. Chỉ một sự việc đang xảy ra ở hiện tại, lúc ta đang nói
Ex: - The farmers are working in the fields
now. (Các nơng dân đang làm việc ngồi đồng)
- My mother is cooking in the kitchen at the moment. (Vào
lúc này mẹ tôi đang nấu ăn trong nhà bếp)
■ Dấu hiệu thì:
a. Trong câu thường có các phó từ:
• now: bây giờ
• at the moment: vào lúc này
• at present: vào lúc này
b. Trong câu bắt đầu bằng những từ gợi sự chú ý như:
• Look! Coi kìa
• Listen! Nghe kìa
Ex: - Look! The boys are fighting. (Coi kìa,
bọn trẻ đang đánh nhau)
- Listen! They are speaking English. (Nghe kìa! Họ đang
nói tiếng Anh)
- Hurry up! The bus is coming. (Nhanh lên! Xe buýt đang
tới rồi kìa)
c. Trong câu có cụm chủ vị có từ WHILE (Trong lúc)
Ex: - I’ll think it over while I’m having my
lunch. (Tôi sẽ suy nghĩ kỹ vấn đề này trong lúc tôi ăn trưa)
2. Diễn tả một việc được xếp đặt xảy ra trong tương lai.
Ex: - What are you doing this evening? (Chiều tối nay bạn định
làm gì)
- We are going to Paris on Friday. (Chúng tôi định đi Pari
vào thứ Sáu)
<b>III. HIỆN TẠI HỒN THÀNH (Present Perfect)</b>
Hình thức: Subject + Has / Have + Past Participle
Cách dùng
1. Để diễn tả một việc đã xảy ra trong quá khứ mà thời gian
không xác định rõ.
Ex: - He has lived in England before.
(Trước đây, anh ấy sống ở Anh quốc)
- We have gone to Dalat several times. (Chúng tôi đã đi
Dalat vài lần)
- She has already seen that film. (Cô ta đã xem phim đó rồi)
- He’s never been there. (Anh ta chưa từng ở đó)
- They haven’t finished their work yet. (Họ chưa làm xong
việc)
- Have you ever spoken Russian before? (Trước đây có bao
giờ bạn từng nói tiếng Nga chưa?)
■ Dấu hiệu thì:
Trong câu thường có
• already: rồi, đã rồi • several times: vài lần
• never: chưa bao giờ • never ... before: trước đây chưa
bao giờ
• yet: chưa • ever: đã bao giờ
• ever ... before: trước đây đã bao giờ
2. Để chỉ một việc đã bắt đầu xảy ra trong quá khứ và hiện đang
còn xảy ra.
Ex: - So far he has had no trouble. (Cho đến nay, anh ấy chưa
năm năm rồi)
- His father has been ill during the last two week. (Bố anh
ấy đã bệnh suốt hai tuần vừa qua)
■ Dấu hiệu thì:
Trong câu thường có các trạng từ chỉ thời gian:
• so far: cho đến nay • up to now: cho
đến nay
• up to the present: cho đến lúc này • since then: kể
từ lúc đó
• since: kể từ khi • for: trong (khoảng
thời gian)
• in / during the last + 1 khoảng thời gian
3. Để diễn tả một hành động mà thời gian nó chưa kết thúc.
Ex: - He has smoked ten cigarettes today. (Hôm nay anh ấy hút
10 điếu thuốc)
- I haven’t seen her this week. (Tuần này tôi không gặp cơ
ấy)
■ Dấu hiệu thì:
Trong câu thường có các phó từ như:
• today: hơm nay
• this week: tuần này
• this month: tháng này
• this term: học kỳ này
• this year: năm nay
4. Để chỉ một sự việc vừa mới xảy ra so với hiện tại
Ex: - I have seen him lately. (Gần đây tơi có gặp anh ấy)
- She’s just gone out. (Cô ta vừa mới đi khỏi)
■ Dấu hiệu thì:
Cách dùng này thường có các từ như:
• just: vừa mới
• recently: gần đây
IV. simple past
The Simple Past can be used with a duration which starts and
stops in the past. Duration is a longer action often indicated by
expressions such as: for two years, for five minutes, all day, all
year, etc .
E.g: I live in Brazil for years
10. The Simple Past can also be used to describe a habit which
stopped in the past. It can have the same meaning as “used to ”.
E.g: They never went to school . They always skipped their
classes
11 . The Simple Past can also be used to describe past facts or
generalizations which are no longer true . As in USE 4 above,
this use of the Simple Past is quite similar to the expression
“used to ”
E .g: She was shy as a child, but now she is very outgoing
<b>V.Past continuous :</b>
+ Use :
* Use the past Continuous to indicate that a longer actoin in the
past was interrupted . The interrupted is a shorter action in the
Simple Past or a specific time . Remember this can be a real
interruption or just an interruption in time .
E. g: I was watching TV when she called .
Last at 6 PM, I was eating dinner
* When you use the Past Continuous with two actions in the
same sentence, it expresses the idea that both actions were
happening in the same time. The actions are parallel.
<b>E.g: I was studying while he was making dinner.</b>
<b>VI.Past perfect</b>
Use:
* The Past Perfect expresses the idea that something occurred
before another action expressed in the Past Simple. It can also
show that something happened before a specific time in the
past.
e.g :had never seen such a beautiful beach before I went to
Hanoi.
2.infinitive and gerund
T reviews the verbs that are followed by an infinitive, a gerund
and both. (in handouts
<b>Infinitive only</b>
Agree Arrange Ask Choose Decide Demand Deserve expect
Fail Hesitate Hope Intend Learn Manage Offer Plan Refuse
Seem Wait
<b>Gerund only</b>
Admit Avoid Deny Enjoy Keep
Verbs that are followed by prepositions
<b>Both</b>
<i><b>Begin Start Continue Stop Love Like Hate Remember Forget </b></i>
3/ Reported speech
reviews reported speech with infinitives:
+ Form: Verb + O + bare-infinitive
+ meaning and use: We usually use an infinitive structure to
report orders, requests, advice, suggestions, threats, warning,
promises, (dis)agreements, and so on. We don’t use “say” in
this structure.
E.g: I told the kids to be quite. The policeman told me not to
park here.
Note: T might want to remind Ss that time and place references
often have to change in reported speech. E.g:
4.conditional
T elicits the from and use of coditional sentences (type 1, 2 and
3 ) from Ss . If necessary T may give Ss the following handout
Type 1.If + simple present will future
In these sentences, the times is the present or future and the
situation is real . They refer to a possible condition and its
probable result
Example :
Like type 1, type 2 refers to the present of future, and the past
tense in the if – clause is not a true past but a subjuntive, which
indicates unreality or improbability .
Example :
+ If I were 18 again I would go on a round – the –world – tour .
(I’m not 18, in fact I’m 45 )
+ If I studied, I would pass the exams
Type 3 If +pat prefect, would have + P2
The time is past, and the condition cannot be fulfilled because
the action in the if – clause didn’t happen .
Exmple :
+ If I had found her address last week, I would have sent her an
invitation .
+ If I had studied, I would have passed the exams
5.Relative clauses
Relative Pronouns
Who whom which that whose
-Ask ss to retell Relative clause
+ Defining clause
+ Now- defining clause
-Ask ss to give examples then retell their functions
Eg:- I met Jane’s father, who works at the U..
- I met the man who helpead me yesterday
+ she is the woman about whom I told you
* Relative pronouns with prepositions
to
with
of whom/ which ( + S + V)
About ( prohibit)
(prep)
Reduce relative clauses
6.Cleft sentences
-Give 3 examples of 3ex 1,2,3 to introduce ss the new grammar
points
( Left sentences)
Ex1: The man gave her the book
S
->It was the man who gave him the book
( focusing on subject)
Ex2: The boy hit the dog in the grander
->It was the dog that the boy hit in the
granden
Ex3:She bought him a present at the shop
-> It was at the shop that she bought him
( focusing on subject)
a present
-Through the examples, ask ss to give the way to use ceft
sentences them selves
-Give other examples then ask ss to practise
Home work
-give exercise by handouts
<b>B. Introduce the Englisn 12 to students.</b>
<b>+ Introduce the Englisn 12 to students.:</b>
- Guide students about the new book.
- Giude them:
+ How to learn each lesson
+ How to learn each section of the lesson.
+ How to study at the class
+ How to prepare the lesson at home…
Demand students to master: 1. The grammar of the test.
2. The main content of the English 12.
3. Master the learning methods.
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>WritingTest 45’</b></i>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- Do the test well
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: textbook, pictures, cassette, tape</b>
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
Họ và tên...Lớp:...
<b>Written test 45’: Tổng số câu đúng .../50</b>
<b>I. Chọn một từ mà phần gạch chân có cách phát âm khác với những từ còn lại</b>
1. a. may b. car c. day d. stay
2. a. advice b. age c. above d. affect
3. a. dry b. sunny c. rainy d. daily
4. a. heal b. head c. mean d. meal
5 a. big b. mild c. winter d. spring
<b>II. Chọn một đáp án thích hợp nhất để hoàn thành các câu sau </b>
1. The music ………….. we are listening is very wonderful.
a. which b. to which c. with which d. who
2.They warned us against ………..that car.
a. buying b. buy c. to buy d. bought
3. His mother prevented him………coming to see me.
a. in b. of c. on d. from
4. The girl ………….. with Ann is very beautiful.
a. worked b. working c. work d. be worked
5. The kind of music ………….. my group plays is hard to describe.
a. that b. who c. whose d. whom
6. The ………….. tells us the days of the week and the months of the year.
a. is b. are c. were d. was
a. am b. are c. was d. were
9. He admitted ………. that vase.
a. broke b. breaking c. to break d. for breaking
10. He did well in ………….. Maths and history.
a. either b. or c. both d. and
11. It is the door that needs …………..
a. replacing b. replacement c. to replace d. replaced
12. It ………….. who saw the ghost.
a. is us b. was us c. was we d. were we
13. The book ………….. I give you is very interesting.
a. which b. that c. d. all are correct
14. The man …………..the bank is a millionaire.
a. is entering b. entering c. to be entered d. enters
15. Tom was the last person …………..the classroom yesterday.
a. to leave b. leaving c. left d. leaves
<b>III. Chọn một đáp án thích hợp để điền vào chỗ trống trong đoạn văn sau</b>
<b>CELEBRATING NEW YEAR</b>
Tet (New Year according to the lunar calendar) is Nam’s favourite festival. He (1)
____ new clothes and eats a (2) _____ good food on that occasion.
On the first day of Tet, Nam and his family (3) _______ his grandparents. He (4)
<i>_______ them and his grandparents beam (tươi cười) with joy and they (5) _______ him tien</i>
<i>mung tuoi (the lucky money).</i>
Then his family has lunch (6) _______ his grandparents. Nam is very surprised (7)
<i>_______ the delicious spread (bữa ăn linh đình/ thịnh soạn) of food before him. “Nam, I</i>
made the spring rolls specially (8) _______ you. You must eat more”, says his grandmother
lovingly. Of course Nam is very happy because (9) _______ is his favourite food. After lunch,
Nam and his sister (10) _______ their mother to clear the table.
1. A. wear B. to wear C. wears D. wearing
2. A. many B. lots C. much D. lot of
3. A. visit B. to visit C. visiting D. visits
4. A. says B. greets C. sees D. asks
5. A. talk B. send C. receive D. give
6. A. to B. of C. with D. among
7. A. with B. at C. on D. in
8. A. for B. to C. with D. at
9. A. they B. he C. she D. it
10. A. to help B. help C. helping D. helps
<b>IV. Đọc đoạn văn sau và chọn đáp án mà em cho là đúng nhất </b>
<b>UNLUCKY DAY</b>
Last Sunday was definitely not a good day for me. It all started when I got into
my car and it refused to start. I immediately realized that I had left the lights on and the
battery had gone flat. I telephoned my friend George and he came round and helped me start
the car. I then drove into town to see a friend. I had arranged to meet him at six thirty, but by
the time I got there, it was ten past seven and my friend was not there. I waited for him for an
hour despite the freezing weather, but he didn’t come. When I returned to my car, I saw that
someone had broken into it, probably looking for the radio. Luckily, I never leave the radio in
the car! There was nothing I could do but get into my car and drive home. Later I spoke with
my friend and discovered that he hag waited for only half an hour and left. He didn’t even
apologise for not waiting for me longer!
A. the lights had gone wrong. B. the battery had gone flat.
C. it hadn’t been serviced. D. the battery had been stolen.
2. What was the weather like when the writer waited for his friend?
A. coldB. hot C. rainy D. foggy
3. In the writer’s opinion, what did the thief want to steal?
A. money B. camera C. radio D. wallet
4. What time did the writer’s friend leave after waiting for him?
A. 6:30 B. 7:00C. 7:10 D. 7:30
5. Which of the following sentences is NOT true?
A. A friend f the writer’s helped him start the car.
B. A friend f the writer’s lived in town.
C. The writer had waited his friend until 7:30.
D. the writer apologized for not waiting his friend for any longer.
<b>V. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho nghĩa không thay đổi </b>
1. Can you pass me the magazine?
- Would you mind ………?
2. The party was so wonderful that we didn’t want to leave
- It was ……….
3. Tom said: “I’m feeling ill.”
- Tom said that……….
4. father doesn’t drink wine any more.
- My father used...
5. People drive very fast, that’s why there are so many accidents.
- If………..
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 1: HOME LIFE</b></i>
<b>Lesson 1: Reading</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
-Understand more about home life.
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
<b>Time Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
10’
10’
<b>I.warm up</b>
-Ask Ss to work in groups and tell about their
family
-suggestions
1.how many people are their in your family?
2.what is your father’s job?
3.what’s your mother’s job?
………
-go round the class and control
-call on some Ss to present
-feedback
-short introduction the types of family (show the
pictures)
<b>Nuclear family</b>
Nuclear family consists of the father, the mother,
and the children
<b>Extended family</b>
Extended family consists of the grandparents, aunts,
uncles, cousins, nephews, nieces, and in- laws,
(relatives through marriage).
<b>SINGLE PARENT FAMILY</b>
A single parent family consists of the children and
one parent either the father and the mother
+ In US, single parent families are popular
+ In Viet Nam, there are more and more the
type of single families
<b> BLENDED FAMILIES OR STEPFAMILIES</b>
-A family in which both parents have been
divorced, each with their own children they remarry
and bring both sets chilren into the marriage
+ It consists of stepparents, stepsister,
stepbrother, halfbrother and half sister.
<b>II.Before you read</b>
<i><b>Pairs work</b></i>
-have SS to look at the pictures in the textbook and
answer questions
1.Who do you think they are?
2.Where is the family?
3.What is each member doing?
4.Is the family happy? Why/why not?
5.Are there any pets? What are they?
6.What are they doing?
7.do you like having pets in your house?
<b>8.What pets do you want to have? </b>
Call some pairs to answer and give feedbacks.
- Introduce the text.
<b>Explain some new words:</b>
Introduce and explain the meaning of the new
Group work
Discuss
Present
Answer.
( In English or Vietnamese )
- Work in pairs.
* Suggestion:
- Parents and children.
- At home.
- The mother is helping the
daughter with her study, the
father is playing with the son.
- Depend on Ss.
10’
10’
words
1. Caring(a): paying attention to the others
2. to run the household.
3. to be willing to do st.
4. household chores
5. responsibility(n):
responsible to sb. For st.
6. mischievous(a)
7. obidient(a)
8. close-knit(a)
9. supportive(a) ~ of
10. frankly(adv)
11. secure(a)
12. confident(a)
confidence(n)
-read aloud and ask Ss to repeat
-explain new words in Vietnamese if necessary
<b>III.While-reading:</b>
- Ask Ss to listen to the tape.
- Ask Ss to read the passage silently to understand
about it
<b>a. Task 1: Choose the best answer</b>
- Get Ss to read the requirement of task1.
- T asks Ss to read through 5 sentences and T helps
them if necessary.
- Asks Ss to work in pairs and choose the answer.
- T gets Ss to share the answers with their groups.
- Call 2 Ss of 2 groups to write down the answers.
- T checks and give feedbacks:
- Let Ss explain some sentences if necessary
<b>b. Task 2: Answer the questions:</b>
- Checks if Ss can answer the comprehension Qs
without reading the text again. If Ss cannot, T gets
them to read the Qs carefully and underline the key
words to do task.
- Gets S to check theirs answers and explain their
choices.
- T calls some Ss to read theirs answers and explain
their choices.
- T comments and gives feedbacks.
Listen to the tape.
- Read the passage silently.
- Find out new words.
Read the passages
- Listen to teacher’s reading.
- Read the text by self.
- Read the task.
- Read through 5 sentences.
- Work in pairs.
- Share the answer.
1-B; 2-C; 3-A; 4-B ;
5-A;
- Work in pairs
1. Very busy. They have to
work long hours and
sometimes they have to work
at night.
2. She is always the first one to
get up in the morning to make
sure that her children leave
home for school having eaten
breakfast and dressed in
3. The daughter helps with
household chores: she washes
dishes and takes out the
garbage. She also looks after
the boys/her younger brothers.
The father sometimes
5’
<b>IV.After you read</b>
- Give some Ss handouts and asks them to fill in the
table the missing information from the reading text
(work in groups of 4).
?what is your mother/father/you responsibility in
your family?
Work father mother children
-washing
dishes
-cooking
………..
*
- T checks and gives feedbacks.
- Let Ss compare the family described in the text
with your own family (basing on the handouts).
- T tells each group to choose a secretary to note
down all of others’ ideas.
- T asks the secretary to report their ideas.
- T comments and corrects Ss’ mistakes.
<b>Homework: - Learn the new words by heart, read </b>
and translate the text, do the tasks again.
- Prepare the section B (The Speaking part of Unit
one).
at weekends.
4. She attempts to win a place
at university.
5. Because they are very
closed – knit and supportive of
one another. They often share
their feelings and whenever
problems come up, they
discuss them frankly and find
solutions quickly.
Work in groups.
- Check.
- Work in groups.
- Report their ideas.
- Listen and comment.
Write down the homework
requirements.
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 1: HOME LIFE</b></i>
<b>Lesson 2: Speaking</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
-- understand more about home life, the relationship and responsibilities of family's
members.
- develop speaking skills: discuss home life, the relationship and responsibilities of
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
5’
10’
20’
<b>I. Warm – up ( 5 min.): Network</b>
- Ask Ss to find out as many as possible
words related to household chores.
- Call some Ss to write on the board.
- Give comments.
<b>II, Pre – speaking:</b>
<b>Task 1: Read the following statements and</b>
<b>tick the ones that apply to you and your</b>
<b>family.</b>
- Ask Ss to work in pairs, exchange the
ideas.
-Walk around and help them
- Call some Ss to talk about their families in
front of the class, using the information in
task 1.
- Give feedback
<b>III.While – speaking</b>
<b>Task two:</b>
- Guide students how to practise.
- Ask students to work in pairs.
- Help the students with new structures.
Give some special expressions
* Could you tell me who….. ?
* By the way who in your family ……. ?
* What about your …. ?
- Walk around and help them.
- Call some pairs of student to stand up and
report before the class.
- Correct their mistakes.
<b>Expected words:</b>
- cleaning the floor
- cooking
- doing the washing up
- washing clothes
- tidying the kitchen
- ironing clothes
- hanging dry the clothes
- repairing/ mending things
- taking care of the baby
- taking out the garbage
- Work in pairs
- Present in front of the class
<b>Feedback:</b>
In my family both my father and
mother go to work. Almost all
members of my family share the
household chores. Washing the dishes
and cleaning the house are what I
often do help my parents. We all like
watching films on TV when we have
free time at weekends. The person I
often share my secrets with is my
sister. I always ask my parents for
advice before making an important
decision.
- Work in pairs .
<b>Expected questions :</b>
1. Could you tell me who works in
your family?
2. By the way who in your family
3. What about your brother ? Does he
share the household chores?
4. What’s your responsibility in the
family?
5. What exactly do you have to do?
6. How do you share the household
chores?
7. What interests do your family
members share together?
8. What do your family members
often do together in your free time?
9. Who do you often share your
secrets with?
10. Who do you often talk to before
making an important decision?
<b>Sample dialogue :</b>
A: - Hi,…Could you tell me a bit
about your family life ?
B: - Sure, no problem.
10’
<b>Task 3: Ask about your partner’s family. </b>
- Ask Ss to study the table carefully.
- Have the Ss to work in pairs, asking about
the partner family life, noting down the
answers in the table.
-Call some pair to act out in front of the class.
- Give comments.
<b>IV.Post – speaking :Report the</b>
<b>information</b>
- Have Ss to work in pair.
- Call some Ss to report in front of the class.
- Correct and give comments.
<b>Homework: - More practice the main</b>
toppics at home.
- Prepare the section C (The Listening part of
Unit one).
A: - Who works in your family?
B: - Both my parents. My father is an
engineer and my mother is a teacher.
A: Do you help them with the
household chores?
B:- Of course. I help my mother in
the kitchen and wash the dishes.
A: -What about your father?
B: -He cleans the floor and
sometimes when my mom is out of
on business he cooks for us.
A: - What interests do your family
members share closely?
B: - Watching films. We often watch
films on TV on Saturday evening
when everybody is free.
A: - Who do you often share your
secret with?
B: - Mother. I think she understand
me well.
A: - So she is the person you often
talk to before making an important
decision?
B:- No, in fact both my parents help a
lot when I have problems.
A: - You must be very happy in such
a family .Thanks for giving me time.
Bye.
B: - Bye.
<b>Expected answer:</b>
I’ ve just talked with B about her
family life.
She told me that both her parents go
to work, so they are very busy. So she
has to shares the household chores
.She often helps her mother in the
kitchen and washes the dishes after
meals. His father is also willing to
help with the housework. He cleans
the house and sometimes when B’s
mom is out on the business. All the
members of her family enjoy
watching films together on Saturday
evening. She shares her secret with
her mother because she thinks that
her mother understand her well.
;however, both parents help her make
important decisions
<i><b> Week: . . . </b></i> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 1: HOME LIFE</b></i>
<b>Lesson 3: Listening</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- understand more about home life
- develop listening skills: listening for main ideas and specific information
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
<b>Method: mainly communicative</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>I.Warm – up: Jumbled word</b>
Rearrange the letters to make a meaningful word.
<b>RINENOU</b>
- Which word can go with “reunion”?
<b>II. While you listen</b>
<b>* Describing the picture</b>
<b>- Ask students to work in pairs, look at and </b>
describe the picture (p16), using the cues:
1. What is happening in the picture?
2. How many pictures are there?/ who are
they?
3. How are they feeling? / How do they look?
- Call some students to answers
- Give feedback and introduce the topic of the
lesson:
Lead- in: In today’s listening section, you’ll hear
the conversation between Paul and Andrea talking
about their family.
- introduce some new words to students by using
pictures or by using definitions in English
Teacher asks students to repeat the words on
the black board.
Teacher has students pay much attention to the
words and how they’re pronounced and tells
students that they’re given cues helping them to
listen to the text well..
* Vocabulary: Listen and repeat
- Play the tape and ask Ss to read after the tape
twice.
<b>-> REUNION </b>
<b>-> Family reunion</b>
Look at the pictures.
- Answer the teacher's questions.
+ They are having a big…..
+ many people..
+ Very happy
<b>Students repeat individually </b>
<b>and in chorus</b>
- Explain new words:
- leftovers / `left әu vәz/ thức ăn thừa
- spread ( v) out /spred/ trải ra
1. to reserve: = to book sth in advance: đặt
trước
2. coach (n): xe chở khách đường dài
the end of a meal
5. flight (n): a journey made by air, especially
in a plane: chuyến bay
<b>III.While you listen</b>
<b>Task 1</b><i><b> : Listen to the conversation between Paul </b></i>
<i><b>and Andrea and decide whether the statements </b></i>
<i><b>are T or F and then correct the false statements</b></i>
Ask students to read through the questions
- Play the tape two times
- Ask Ss to do individually then compare the
<b>answer with a partner. </b>
- Play the tape again, have students listen and
check the answers
- Call some Ss to give the answers
- Checks and gives feedback.
<b>Task 2: Note down two things that are </b>
<b>different about Paul’s and Andrea’s families.</b>
- Ask students to read through the questions.
- Let them do the task without listening again.
- Play the tape twice .
- Ask students to do Task 2 then compare the
<b>answer with a partner. </b>
- Play the tape again, have students listen and
check the answers
- Ask some students to read the answers
- Checks and gives feedback.
- Read through the questions
- Work individually to do the
task
- Compare the answers
<b>answer</b>
1. T
2. F ( They not a very close – nit
family, they rarely get together
as a family any more.)
3. F ( It is about 180 kilometers
from they ….)
4. T ( There are 4 children in
Paul’s family)
5. T ( There are too many people
to cook for, they end up going
out to dinner a lot.)
- Read through the questions.
- Work individually to do the
task
- Try to do the task without
listening again.
- Compare the answers
- Listen again and check the
answers
<b>answer:</b>
<b>Paul</b> <b>Andrea</b>
His family
members are
not very
close.
<b>IV. after you listen : Discussing </b>
- Ask Ss to work in groups, discuss the questions:
<i><b>The importance of family in a person's life</b></i>
- Ask some students to present their discussion in
front of the class.
- Give feedback
<b>Homework:</b>
- Summarise main points.
- Write about family reunion.
- Prepare Part D
The families
often eat the
meal the
mother cooks
at home.
The family
often goes out
to eat when
they get
together.
- Work in groups, discuss the
<i>questions </i>
- Report their discussion
<b>answer:</b>
<b> Family is very important. It’s a </b>
place where people can share
their secrets and find solutions to
problems that arise. Only in
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 1: HOME LIFE</b></i>
<b>Lesson 4: Writing</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- Understand more about home life
- Develop listening skills: listening for main ideas and specific information
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
Textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
<b>Time Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
5’ <b>I.</b> <b>Warm up</b>
-Ask Ss to work in pairs and answers some
questions
1. Do your parents often let you go out in the
evening ?
2. Are you allowed to use your family
motorbike?
Pairs work
1. My parents don’t let me come
home late.
2. My father permits me to use the
family motorbike.
15’
20’
3.Are you allowed to do the household chores?
-call on some pairs to present their answer in
front of the class
-feedback
Lead in: In today’s lesson, you’re going to write
<b>II.Pre-writing: groups work</b>
<b>Task 1: What rules do you have in your </b>
<b>family?</b>
<b>+Have students revise the verbs </b>
* let sb + V
*allow sb + to V
*have to + V (obligation)
*permit sb + to V
- T delivers Ss handouts (Task 1 – Complete
tthe following sentences).
1. During the school year, I am not allowed
________
2. I have to………..
3. My parents allow me……….
4. My parents want me not………
- T asks some Ss to go to the BB to write down
their sentences
- T together with Ss finds out the mistakes and
corrects them
<b>III. while writing</b>
<b>Task 2: Write a letter to a pen pal about your</b>
<b>family rules. </b>
- T asks Ss to work in groups and use the ideas
they have written above to write a letter about
their family rules.
T goes around to offer help
- T calls four representatives of four groups to
go to the BB to write down their letters
- T together with Ss finds out the mistakes and
corrects them
T gives feedback on Ss’ work
T points out some common mistakes made by Ss
when doing this writing task.
chores.
- Ss work in groups
1.During the school year, I am not
allowed to come home late / watch
TV …
2. I have to clean my house / do the
washing
3. My parents allow me to watch
TV / go out with my friends on
Saturday or Sunday…
4. My parents want me not to stay
up late / chat with my friends on
the phone
- Ss work in groups
Dear Mary,
Today, I have something
interesting to tell you. It’s my
family’s rules. Every family has its
own rules. Mine has a few. First,
during the school year I’m allowed
to watch TV until I have finished
my homework. Sometimes my
parents let me go out with my
friends on Saturday or Sunday, but
I must come home early. Second,
in my family everybody has to do
their share of the household chores.
And mine are doing the washing
and preparing meals. Third, my
parents want me not to chat on the
phone more than ten minutes. How
5’ <b>IV.Post-writing </b><sub>T asks Ss to make a conversation about the </sub>
content of their letter
T calls some Ss to practice the conversation in
the front of class
- T remarks generally Ss’ written work
<b>Homework: - Rewrite at home.</b>
- Prepare the section E
(The Language focus part of
Unit one).
Daisy
Work in pairs
A. Do your parents let you go out
in the evening?
B. Sometimes on Saturday or
Sunday.
A. Are you allowed to watch TV?
B. ………….
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 1: HOME LIFE</b></i>
<b>Lesson 5: Language Focus</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
+ Distinguish and pronounce correctly the ending sounds / s, z / .
+ Use correctly the Simple past, past continuous and present perfect
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
Textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
……….
<b>Time</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>I. Warm – up: tongue twisters.</b>
<b>- Hang a poster on the B.B, Ask Ss to read the </b>
tongue twisters as quickly as possible. If one
read 3 times he wins.
<i><b> She sees Susie sitting in a shoe shine shop.</b></i>
<i><b> Where she sits she shines, and where she </b></i>
<i><b>shines she sits. </b></i>
- Ask Ss to pick out the word containing the
ending sounds / s, z / and put in the correct
column. .
- Write on the B.B
<b>II.. Pronuciation:</b>
+ Listen and repeat:
- Read and ask students to listen and compare
the difference betweet / z / and / s /.
- Let students listen again and to repeat.
- Write some words on board and ask students
to read them aloud.
+ Pratise these sentences:
- Read one before then read again and ask
<b>Read the tongue twisters</b>
<b> / s / / z /</b>
<b> sits sees</b>
shines
students to repeat.
- Askk students to practise themselves.
- Walk around and help them
<b>III. Grammar: Tense revision</b>
<b> 1. Tense revision :</b>
- Hang a poster, Ask Ss to do the exercise .
<b>Poster: Use the correct tenses: simple past, </b>
<b>past continuous or present perfect.</b>
1. When you (buy) that car?
- I (buy) it 2 year ago.
2. At this time yesterday we (play) football.
3. At 7 p.m last Sunday we (visit) the zoo.
4. When I (have ) dinner, my friend (call).
5. I (already/see )Titanic
- Call a student to do on the B.B while the other
practice individually.
- Correct and give feedback.
- Ask Ss to remark the uses of these tenses,
<b>remarks</b>
<b>* Simple past is used to denote an action </b>
happening at a specific time in the past with no
relating to the present.
<b>* Past continuous is used to express action </b>
that was in progress at a specific time in the
past; it is also used to express action that was
in progress when something else happened.
<b>2, Practice: Exercises 1 (p.18) ; Ex 2( p.19)</b>
- Ask Ss to do exercises provided in the books.
- Have them do individually, and then compare
the answers with the partners.
- Call Ss to give the answers.
- Correct and give feedback
<b>* Additional exercise: Choose the best </b>
<b>answers</b>
1. The man got out the car,…. round to the
back and opened the boot.
A. walking B. walked C. walks D. walk
Do exercise individually
-> 1. did….buy ; bought
Remarks
Do exercises
<b>Exercises 1: Underline the most </b>
<b>suitable…</b>
1. Have you seen
2. have you enjoyed
3. has been married
4. Did you give ; saw
5. didn’t listen
6. Have you two met
7. Did you meet
<b>Exercises 2 Which answer best fit</b>
<b>each …</b>
1. B 8. C
2. C 9. B
3. A 10. C
4. A 11. B
5. B 12. C
6. B 13. C
2. I saw Maggie at the party. She … in several
films.
A. wears B. wore C. was wearing
D. has worn
3. After I had had lunch, I…. for my bag.
A. looked B. had looked C. have looked
D. look
<b>Homework: </b>
- Redo the exercises at home.
- Prepare Unit 2 (The reading part of Unit 2).
<i><b> Week: . . . </b></i> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 2: Cultural diversity</b></i>
<b>Lesson 1: Reading</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- understand some more about the senses and personal experiences directly related to the
sense.
<b> - improve their reading skills </b>
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
………..
<b>Time</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
5’ <b>I. Warm – up ( 5 min.) :Network</b>
Competition game – network.
- Prepares a hand out with a network of the
word’ a Marriage” and asks Ss the Question
- What things make a marriage happy?
<b> Marriage</b>
- Teacher divides the class into 8 groups and
gives each group a hand out. Teacher asks Ss to
Group work
<b>Expected words:</b>
-romantic love
- understanding
- sharing
- partnership of equals
……
15’
20’
complete the network.
- The winner will be the group completing the
network in the shortest period of time.
- Ask students to look at the pictures and work in
pairs to ask and answer the questions.
?what can you see in the pictures?
What are the differences between them?
Call students to answer before the class
Feedback
Lead to the lesson
<b>II.</b> <b>Before you read</b>
<b>* Pair works:</b>
- Ask Ss to work in pairs and discuss the
question: +Which of the following factors is the
most important for a happy life? Why?
- Love a nice house / flat.
- Money, a good job.
- Parents,<sub> approval good health.</sub>
- T asks Ss to talk before the class and give the
reason why. The other can asks Questions.
<b>*Vocabulary: </b>
Give some main words to present using
vocabulary technique to teach.
1.Phycical attractiveness
2. Confiding.
3. Partnership of equals
4. Trust built on love
5.diversity (n)
6.diversify (v)
7.diverse (adj)
8.approval (n)
9.marriage (n)
-read aloud and ask Ss to repeat
-correct mistake
<b>III.While you read:</b>
<b>-Ask Ss to read the text silently to do the tasks. </b>
Focus on the phrases physical attractiveness;
confiding; partnership of equals and trust built on
love….
- Open the tape. T can ask 1 or 2 good student to
read the text aloud.
Free answers
Pair work/ group work
Read the passage silently
Individual work/ group work and
pair work
<b>answers</b>
1 – a; 2 – d; 3- b; 4 – e; 5- c
5’
<b>*Task 1 Explain the meaning of the word/ </b>
- Ask Ss to read the sentences silently to
understand what to do.
If Ss have any problems, T might be able to
help them by giving the instruction.
<b>- Give handouts Matching </b>
1.Precede a. happen or exist before
2. Determine b. tell some – one about something
Very private or secret
3.Confide
4. Sacrifice c. having a duty to do something.
5. Obliged d. find out
e. willingly stop having something
you want
-Goes around for help
- Call on Ss to read aloud what they do.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
-Get Ss to read the sentences in task loud what
they do the other can translate them into
Vietnamese pairs by pairs
<b>* Task 2 Answer the following questions:</b>
- Get Ss to read the whole text silently to answers
the question
- Ask them to work in pairs or groups asks and
answers the questions
- Call on some Ss to answer in front of the class.
- Give feedback
<b>IV.After you read:</b>
- T divides class into small groups of 6 or 8 and
asks them to discuss the question: what are the
differences between a tradition Vietnamese
family?
* Number of children.
*The house they like to have.
<b>answers</b>
1. They are Physical
attractiveness; Confiding ;
Partnership of equals; trust built
on love.
2. The young Americans are
When choosing a wife or a
husband.
3. The Indian students agree that
a woman has to sacrifice more in
a marriage than a man.
4. The American wife trusts her
husband to do the right thing
because he loves her not because
he has to do.
5. The main finding of the survey
is that young Asians are not as
romantic as their American
counterparts
Pairs work
* The head of the family.
*Who works?
*Who takes care of the housework and children?
* The income….
T goes around to help Ss if they have any
- T asks to talk before the class some pairs
groups
<b>Homework: </b>
- Learn the new words by heart, read and
translate the text, do the tasks again.
- Prepare the section B (The Speaking part of
Unit two).
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 2: Cultural diversity</b></i>
<b>Lesson 2: Speaking</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- understand more about differences among cultures.
- discuss information that relates to the differences between Vietnamese and
American cultures
- to improve the students’ speaking skills
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
……….
<b>time Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
5’ <b>I. Warm - up ( 5 min.)</b>
Gives two tables and asks Ss to work in group
of three or four to complete the table
Give a picture
10’
-Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer
questions
1. What are they doing?
2. Can you guess where they are?
3. In Viet Nam, do people often kiss in
public? Why or Why not?
4. What about in America?
-lead to the new lesson. Today we will learn
about the differences between Vietnamese and
American cultures
<b>II.pre-speaking</b>
<b>Task 1</b>
T asks Ss to open the book on page 22
- T asks Ss to read the sentences in the box in
Task 1 on page 22.
- T can explain some special expressions if
necessary.
- T reads aloud and instructs Ss how to use
these expressions.
Some special expressions
I think / feel / believe….. I don’t
agree……
In my opinion …… It’s not
true……..
For me….. That’s true /
wrong /….
- T ask Ss to express their point of view on the
following ideas, using the words or expressions
in the box.
● In Vietnam, there are three or vevn more
generation may live in a nhome.
● A happy marriage should be based on love.
● In some Asian countries, love is supposed to
follow marriage not precede it.
● In some countries, a man and a woman may
hold hands and kiss each other in public.
- T can make a sample conversation with a
student
<i><b>Sample</b></i>
1. They are kissing
2. In the public / In the street
Ss open the book and look at the
sentences in the box on page 22.
- Ss listen to the teacher and write
down the new expression in their
notebooks.
- Ss read after the teacher
- Students choose some of these
ideas and then use the expressions in
the box to express their points of
view.
15’
10’
5’
<i><b>T: I think a happy marriage should be based </b></i>
<i>on love.</i>
<i><b>S: I quite agree with you. Life will be terrible if</b></i>
<i>there is not true love between a husband and a </i>
<i>wife.</i>
<i><b>T: But in some Asian countries love is </b></i>
<i>supposed to follow marriage, not precede it.</i>
<i><b>S: For me, I don’t think it’s true (What will </b></i>
<i>happen if there is no true love even after </i>
<i>marriage). How can two people who don’t love</i>
<i>each other live happily in the same house?</i>
- T goes round the class and helps Ss if
necessary.
- T can divide the class into the suitable groups
<b>III.While-speaking</b>
<b>Task 2</b>
- ask Ss to look at task 2 on page 23 and tells
them to read the typical features of the
American culture in pairs, and then discuss and
find out the corresponding features of the
Vietnamese culture.
- help Ss with the new words and the
pronunciation.
- give Ss some expressions to help them
<i>Some expressions</i>
<i>Do you know that………?</i>
<i>It is said that……..</i>
<i>It is said that in the newspaper / on TV / radio </i>
<i>that….</i>
-Ask Ss to work in pairs to do the task
-Call on some pairs to give their ideas
- Correct and gives feedback
<b>III.</b> <b>Post speaking</b>
<b>Task 3: Talk about the similarities and </b>
<b>differences between Vietnamese and </b>
<b>American in cultures </b>
- Explain how to do the task 3
- Ask Ss to read the answer of task 2 again
before doing the task 3
- Ask Ss to work in group of four
- Call on some pairs to give their ideas
- Correct and give feedback
<b>Home work</b>
-Ask Ss to work the tasks again
- Ask Ss to write a short passage about the
Ss read task 2
- Ss write down some expressions in
their notebooks.
Answers
- three or sometime four generations
live under one roof
- Elders live with children and are
taken care of by their sons
- Asking about age, marriage and
income is acceptable.
- A Vietnamese greets the head of
the family or an older person first,
then the younger ones
- Groceries are bought everyday
- Tet(Lunar New Year) is the most
important
- Children often sleep with their
Take note
<i>There are differences and </i>
<i>similarities between Vietnamese and </i>
<i>American cultures. In America, there</i>
<i>are two generations live in the same </i>
<i>house. In Vietnam, two, three or </i>
<i>even four generations live under on </i>
<i>roof. It’s tradiotional for children to </i>
<i>live near and take care of their </i>
<i>parents so old people in Vietnam </i>
<i>don’t live in nursing home as </i>
differences and similarities in celebrating a
wedding ceremony in Vietnam and American
- Prepare part C
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 2: Cultural diversity</b></i>
<b>Lesson 3: listening</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- Listen and understand the conversation about the wedding ceremony in Vietnam.
- Listen and fill the missing information in the gaps
- Listen and answer the questions about the wedding ceremony in Vietnam
- Know some more new words about wedding ceremony.
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
………
5’ <i><b>I. Warm-up ( 5 MIN.): cross </b></i>
<i><b>words</b></i>
-Give the cross words on the
additional board.
- Read aloud each clue, gets
students say aloud the answers.
<b>*cross word:</b>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
<b>*clues:</b>
1. the woman that a man is
married to
2. every marriages should be
based on this
3. what do we call a woman on
her wedding day?
4. the man that a woman is
Class work
Each student with a correct answer will be given
a present.
<b>suggested answers:</b>
1 W I F E
2 L O V E
3 B R I D E
4 H U S B A N D
5 S P R I N G
6 R I N G
7 G R O O M
5. people often choose this season to hold
wedding ceremonies.
6. to show that you are married, what do you
often wear?
15’
15’
married to
-checks and correct.
-Ask Ss to guess the topic of the
-lead to the new lesson
<b>II.Before you listen</b>
- ask Ss to open the book.
- ask Ss to look at the pictures on
page 24 and discuss what is
happening in each one.
- gives some guide questions:
1. What do you see in the
pictures?
2. Who are they?
3. What are they doing?
-check correct answers
Ask students to discuss the two
questions:
1.Have you ever attended a
wedding ceremony?
2.what do the bridge and the
groom usually do at the wedding
ceremony?
T. introduces the new lesson: You
will hear two people talking about
a wedding ceremony in Vietnam.
<b>* Vocabulary: Listen and </b>
<b>Repeat</b>
T. teach some new words first
and then plays the tape for
students to listen and repeat.
<i>Altar: bàn thờ </i>
<i>Master of Ceremony:</i>
<i>Banquet: </i>
<i>Groom: chú rể</i>
<i>Bride:cô dâu </i>
<i>Ancestor: ông bà tổ tiên </i>
<i>Tray: khay</i>
<i>Schedule: lịch </i>
<i>Blessing</i>
<b>III.While you listen</b>
<b>1.TASK 1</b>
- T explains Task 1 to the Ss
<i>You will hear two people talking </i>
<i>about a wedding ceremony in </i>
Get Ss to read carefully five
Ss look at the pictures on page 24, work in groups
and then discuss what is happening in each one.
- Ss answer the teacher’s questions
<i>1. I see a wedding ceremony</i>
<i>2. a bride and a groom</i>
<i>3. They are bringing a lot of gifts</i>
<i>Answers</i>
<i>1.yes, I have</i>
<i>2. they usually …………..</i>
Ss write down the new words in the notebook.
- Ss repeat
- Read
- Listen
- Compare
- Listen and check
- Expected answer:
4. at the wedding banquet
5. wedding cards/ money
10’
sentences before listening the tape
to do the task.
- Play the tapes twice
(T. can play the tape one more
time if students have difficulty.)
- Ask Ss to work individually,
then compare their answers with
the other student.
- Call on some Ss to give their
answers, correct and give
feedback.
<i><b>2. Task 2: Answering </b></i>
-Ask Ss to read carefully the five
questions first, then let them try
to answer before listening again
to do the task.
-Play the tape twice, one for
doing the task, one for giving
feedbacks.
Call on some Ss to give their
answers, correct and give
feedback.
<b>IV.After you listen</b>
-explains the task and asks Ss to
work in groups to discuss the
<i>question: What do families often </i>
<i>to do to prepare for a wedding </i>
<i>ceremony?</i>
Suggestions
- the importantance of wedding
ceremony to Vietnamese people
- the preparation for the
wedding
- what groom and bride do
on their wedding day
- banquet ( place, food,
drink….)
guests ( gifts, blessing, ….)
-call on some groups to present
their answers
<b>Homework </b>
Write a short paragraph to
introduces about the wedding
ceremonies in Vietnam
the tape for three times and answer the question
1. The most important thing the groom’s family
has to do on the wedding day is to go to the
bride’s house bringing gifts wrapped in red paper.
2. They would pray, asking their ancestors’
permission to get married.
3. After they pray and ask their ancestors’
permission to get married.
4. The wedding banquet is usually held at the
groom’s and bride’s home or at a hotel or a
restaurant.
5. They stop by each table to thank their guests
- Ss read the question carefully and then discuss
in groups
Answers
<i>The wedding is very important to the bride and </i>
<i>the groom as well as the two families. The </i>
<i>wedding day is carefully chosenm by the groom’s</i>
<i>parents because they think that it will affect the </i>
<i>future life of the new couple. Both families have </i>
<i>to talk with each other to decide the place, the </i>
<i>number of the guests and how to hold the </i>
<i>banquet. Not oly the bride and the groom but </i>
<i>nearly all members in the two families have to be</i>
<i>sure in their best clothes on that day. The altars </i>
<i>od the both families are cleaned and well </i>
<i>decorated. Then comes the cars and the flowers. </i>
<i>They have to be ordered in advance so that </i>
<i>everything will be available on that day. </i>
<i>Everybody is very busy but they all look forward </i>
<i>to that important day.</i>
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 2: Cultural diversity</b></i>
<b>Lesson 4: writing</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- Write a description about a symbol of the Vietnamese Culture: The Conical Leaf Hat
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
……….
<b>Time</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
5’
15’
<b>I. Warm – up ( 5 min. ) </b>
-Paint some pictures on the board :
P1 P2 P3 P4
-Asks Ss to look at the pictures and asks: What’s
this?
-Asks Ss some questions:
1. Where in Vietnam do people often wear leaf
hat?
2. Who wear it?
3. What form is it?
<b>leads to the new lesson → Describing the</b>
<b>conical leaf hat.</b>
<b>II.pre-writing</b>
Gives Ss some new words:
+ leaf (n): lá cây
+ rim (n): vành
+ ribs (n): g©n (lá cây )
+ strap (n): dây(da, lụa, vải)
Reads once time and then asks Ss to repeat again
- Ask Ss to copy it down into their notebooks
<b>TASK 1</b>
- T can ask Ss to close the book and answer
some questions
1. Have you ever worn a conical leaf hat?
2. Have you ever seen a conical leaf hat?
- Now T asks Ss to open the book on page 25,
look at Task 1
T explains Task 1:
You are going to write about the conical leaf hat
or “nãn l¸”, a symbol of Vietnamese culture.
Look at the picture below, write Vietnamese
equivalents for the English words
- T suggests useful expressions
<b>Useful expression</b>
Look at the board
Look at the pictures and answer:
P1:A line/a slope
P2:A conical form
P3: A triangle
P4: A leaf hat
<b>Expected answers:</b>
1. Vietnam, Hue city
2. girls, women
3. Conical form
Listen and repeat again
- Ss listen to the teacher’s
questions and give the answers.
<i>The answer is optional</i>
- Ss look at the picture on page
25, work in pairs and finish Task
1
20’
<i>To be made from: đợc làm bằng </i>
- T gives some suggested questions
1. What is a symbol of Vietnamese girls and
women?
2. What is considered as a part of the spirit of
Vietnamese nation?
3. What is it made from?
4. What does it look like?
5. What is the diameter?
6. How high is it?
6. How many ribs are shaped into a conical
form?
7. What is it used for?
<b>III.While-writing</b>
following questions:
1. How many parts are there in your
writing?
2. What are they?
3. What do you include in the main body?
-Ask Ss to write a passage of about 150 words
about the conical leaf hat of Vietnam, using the
out line and information below.
-ask Ss to work individually
- T goes round the class to help Ss if necessary
-After that, asks Ss to exchange their writing
- Ss answer the question
<i>1. The conical leaf hat is a</i>
<i>symbol of Vietnamese girls and</i>
<i>women.</i>
<i>2. It is also considered as a part</i>
<i>of the spirit of Vietnamese nation.</i>
<i>3. It’s made from a special kind</i>
<i>4. It has a conical form.</i>
<i>5. The diameter is about 45 or 50</i>
<i>centimeters and it is about 25 or</i>
<i>30 centimeters high.</i>
<i>6. Either 16 or 18 ribs are</i>
<i>shaped into a conical form which</i>
<i>is then covered with palm leaves.</i>
<i>The leaves are sewn into rims.</i>
<i> Finally the hat is trimmed and</i>
<i>painted with a coat of attar oil.</i>
<i>7. The conical leaf hat is used to</i>
<i>protect people from the sun and</i>
<i>the rain.</i>
<i>- Wearing this conical leaf hat in</i>
<i>summer sunny days, girls look</i>
<i>more charming.</i>
<i>- The hat also helps to protect</i>
<i>their complexion and give them a</i>
<i>cool feeling in such hot weather.</i>
1. Three
2. Introduction – main body –
3. Materials – shape and size –
process
<b>Sample writing :</b>
5’
<b>IV. Post - Writing</b>
- Feedback to students’ writing
- Collects some of Ss’ works to give feedback
-Should draw Ss’ attentions to the organization
of description and the language use, especially
the verb tenses
<b>HOMEWORK</b>
- T asks Ss to write task page 19 in the student’s
workbook.
45 or 50 centimeters in diameter
and about 25 or 30 centimeters
high. The conical form is then
covered with palm leaves which
are sewn into all ribs. Finally, the
hat is trimmed and painted with a
coat of attar oil.
The conical leaf hat is used like
an umbrella to protect people
from the sun and the rain. Beneath
the broad rims of the leaf hat, the
girls and women look more pretty
and attractive. Unfortunately they
are now only used by pedestrians
or those who ride bicycles.
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 2: Cultural diversity</b></i>
<b>Lesson 5: Language Focus</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- Pronounce correctly the – ed endings sound of verb in the simple past tense.
- Review the usage of tenses.
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
5’
10’
<b>I.</b> <b>Warm up</b>
Hang a chart with 12 verbs (both regular verb
and irregular verb) with the form: infinitive
without “To”.
For example
<i>see, need, go, laugh, teach, eat, miss, paint, </i>
<i>close, run, play, help</i>
Divide class into 4 groups.
- Read loudly 12 verbs 2 times.
-Ask Ss to rewrite all verbs which they hear.
-Call leader of each group to go to BB and
write down.
-Check and choose the winner.
-Call some students read all verbs when
adding “ed” at the end of each verb.
- Ask Ss to give comment and note how to
read “ed”.
- leads-in new lesson.
<b>II. pronunciation</b>
<b>Activity 1:</b>
- look at
- listen
- listen
- rewrite
- answer
- listen
Ss change these verbs into past
simple
25’
- T gives Ss the rules of pronouncing the
verbs ending in -ed
There are three ways
1. ed → /d/ after voiced consonants and
vowels.
<b>2. ed → /t/ after [ k, p, s, ∫, t∫, f )</b>
3. ed → /id/ after / t, d/
- T asks Ss to look at the verbs on the board
and then write them into the right column
- T reads aloud and asks Ss to repeat
- T asks Ss to open the book and look at the
words on page 27
- T asks Ss to practice
<b>Activity 2:</b>
-Ask Ss to practise reading sentences in
textbook in pairs and then arrange the verbs
into 3 kinds: /t/ - /d/ - /id/.
-Check and gives feedback.
-Play the tape (or read) and ask Ss repeat.
(note sentence stress
<b>III.grammar: tense revision</b>
-asksss to look back the examples above and
review the tense
I have learned English for 7 years
- I visited my friends.
- check and give feedback
<b>Exercise1: Use the correct form of the </b>
-Ask Ss to work individually carefully and
then work in pairs.
-Explains how to use tense if necessary.
- Call some Ss to answer and ask class to
give comment.
- Give feedback.
- Calls some pairs read the conversation.
<i><b>* Exercise 2: Multiple choices </b></i>
- Ask Ss to read exercise carefully.
-Explain the meaning of the difficult words
- Explain how to use tense of necessary.
-Ask Ss work in pairs
-Call on some Ss answer and asks class to
give comment.
-give feedback.
<b>Exercise 3: Complete the letter with the </b>
<b>correct form of the verbs in brackets</b>
Giude students how to do
- Do the first as an example.
- Correct
<b>homework ( 5 min.):</b>
Ss write down the rules in the
notebook.
<i><b>Suggestion</b></i>
/ t/ / d / / id /
<i>laughed</i>
<i>missed</i>
<i>helped</i>
<i>closed</i>
<i>played</i>
<i>needed</i>
<i>painted</i>
- Ss repeat
- Read
- Arrange
- work in pairs
- remind.
<b>answers:</b>
1. Have you seen ; saw ; am going to
see
2. drank ; haven’t drunk ; drank
3. has written ; Did she write ; wrote
4. have been cooking ; cooked ;
cooked
- Practise the conversation
<b>Answers :</b>
1. C 5. C
2. A 6. A
3. C 7. C
4. A 8. A
<b>answer:</b>
1. moved
2. moved
3. have asked
4. have not stopped
5. study
5’
- Review tenses
EX 1: Choose the best answer:
1. The wedding party …. at the Rex Hotel.
A. is B. is being C. will be D. are
2. By the end of next year Gorge …..English
for 2 years.
A. will have learned B. will learn
C. has learned D. would learn
3. We …. English this time last week.
A. learned B. were learning
C. have learned D. had learned
4. The child …. before the doctor arrived.
A. died B. had died
C. has died D. was dying
EX 2: Rewrite this sentences
1. He has been teaching for 20 years.( He
started…)
2. How long have you studied English ?
( When)
3. They finished their work, then they drank
in the pub.( After…)
- Prepare Unit 3
A
A
B
B
He started teaching 20 years
ago.
When did you start to study
English ?
After they had finished their work,
they drank in the pub.
<b>Extra exercises</b>
<i><b>Choose the best answer a, b, c or d</b></i>
1.You aren’t concentrating on your work. What ……….. about?
a. are you thinking b. were you thinking
c. did you think d. did you thought
2. My brother never ……….. the washing up.
a. do b. does c. makes d. make
3. Perhaps people don’t like ……….. tourists in their country.
a. so much b. too much c. so many d. a lot
4. ……….. four years in the Olympic Games, we see people from warring countries shake
hands.
a. for b. in c. after d. every
5. I ……….. of learning how to fly a plane now.
a. am thinking b. think c. thought d. have thought
6. My car’s old but it never ………..
a. breaks down b. break down c. get down d. gets down
7. Lots of tulips ……….. grown in Holland.
a. is b. are c. have d. has
8. This room is used ……….. meetings.
a. for b. by c. to d. as
9. Sister Wendy not only loves God and art but also ……….. good food and wine.
a. hates b. dislikes c. enjoys d. prefers
10. I ……….. what you mean.
a. am not understand b. didn’t understand
c. don’t understand d. haven’t understood
11. About 1,000 people are ……….. in that factory.
a. after b. for c. at d. up
13. They didn’t tell the policeman ……….. they had taken the money.
a. if b. that c. whether d. Ø
14. Last summer, my family ……….. a four day holiday on Sam Son beach.
a. spent b. went c. had gone d. had spent
15. Picasso showed his truly exceptional talent ……….. a very young age.
a. in b. from c. at d. during
16. After his mother died, Scott ……….. home to seek his fortunate in St. Louis.
a. left b. was leaving c. had left d. has left
17. When I was in paris, I ……….. a lot of friends.
a. took b. made c. was making d. was taking
18. I ……….. wash my hair. It’s too dirty.
a. have to b. should c. will d. must
19. He ……….. take this medicine three times a day.
a. can b. has to c. must d. will
20. We aren’t ……….. to smoke and chew gum in class.
a. allowed b. managed c. able d. possible
21. I don’t think you ……….. take anything valuable.
a. have to b. should c. can d. must
22. The more I learn, the more I realize ……….. know.
a. how little I don’t c. how little I
c. how few I d. how few I don’t
23. Tom doesn’t like dancing, but Mike ………..
a. does b. did c. do d. doesn’t
24. Listen! Somebody ……….. for help.
a. are screaming b. scream c. is screaming d. has scream
25. I have a test tomorrow, so I ……….. sit up late tonight to study.
a. will have to b. can have to c. have d. have to
26. Ann agreed to stay behind, she was used to ……….. late.
a. work b. working c. worked d. works
27. Have you booked your holiday? – Yes, we have. We ……….. to Italy.
a. will go b. can go c. are going d. must go
28. I haven’t got enough money to pay for my ticket.
- It’s Ok. I ……….. you some.
a. will lend b. am lending c. am going to lend d. lend
29. I think it’s interesting ……….. in London.
a. to go shopping b. go shoppingc. going shopping d. in going shopping
30. Have you got toothache again?
- Oh! It’s agony! But I ……….. the dentist this afternoon.
a. see b. am seeing c. will see d. have to see
31. None of them knows very much about the places they ………..
a. visit b. visited c. are visiting d. going to visit
32. Is it possible ……….. rooms with a sea view?
a. having b. have c. to have d. to having
33. She really annoys me. I can’t stand people ……….. her.
a. with b. like c. as d. the same
34. Why did I agree ……….. with you?
a. work b. working c. to work d. to
working
35. We would like ……….. our holiday on the beach.
a. spend b. to spend c. spending d. to spending
36. I want ……….. more careful with your homework in future.
37. I wasn’t allowed ……….. out unless my parents knew where I was going
a. to go b. going c. to going d. go
38. We don’t like living in ……….. towns.
a. young b. capital c. excited d. busy
39. We have been good friends ……….. we were at university.
a. as b. when c. while d. since
40. Nearly 30 people ……….. in the earthquake this morning.
a. have been injured b. were injured c. have injured d. injured
41. I really look forward ……….. you again.
a. meet b. meeting c. to meet d. to meeting
42. I first met my husband ……. 1995
a. for b. ago c. in d. since
43. I’ll give you a ring when I ……….. the time of the train.
a. know b. am knowing c. will know d. am know
44. If I ……….. the national lottery ticket, I would buy a bigger house.
a. win b. won c. get d. got
45. We live in the city. We wish we ……….. in the country.
a. are living b. live c. have lived d. lived
46. If I ……….. travel around the world, I would go to Hawaii.
a. can b. could c. may d. want
47. If the teacher ……….. me extra homework tonight, I will not go out with you.
a. makes b. gives c. helps d. lets
48. Do you know where ……….. my glasses?
a. I do put b. do I put c. have I put d. I have put
49. You won’t tell anyone about the truth, ………..?
a. will you b. won’t you c. you will d. you won’t
50. I have know idea ……….. the biggest office in the world is?
a. why b. what c. how d. when
51. I’m not sure how many babies ……….. every hour.
a. are born b. born c. were born d. will be born
52. You can use a word processor, ……….. you?
a. have b. don’t c. can’t d. can
53. I wonder how ……….. to celebrate his birthday.
a. he is going b. is he going c. he will d. will he
54. I don’t know where my husband gets the money ………..
a. to b. from c. at d. in
55. Our train ……….. at 7,00, doesn’t it?
a. has left b. have left c. leaves d. leave
56. He made me believe that they ……….. the district.
a. had left b. left c. will leave d. are leaving
57. John is not at home. He ……….. his doctor about his sore throat.
a. sees b. is seeing c. saw d. has seen
58. They were too late. The plane ……….. off ten minutes earlier.
a. took b. had taken c. has taken d. was taking
59. When the teacher speaks, we have to keep quiet, ……….. ?
a. don’t we b. musn’t we c. won’t we d.doesn’t he
60. Paper money ……….. for over 1,000 years.
a. has been used b. has used c.was used d. used
61. The weather has been bad this week. Next week it ……….. probably be even worse.
a. is b. will c. is going d. must
62. She finally decided ……….. her children alone in the house.
a. to not leave b. not to leave c. not leaving d. not leave
a. said b. told c. ask d. remembered
64. We always ……….. lots of photos while we are on holiday.
a. make b. take c. catch d. do
65. Can you explain to me ……….. so many people think Dolphins are very clever.
a. why b. what c. how d. whether
66. We are really looking forward to ……….. home at the weekend.
a. to go b. gone c. going d. go
67. I’. ……….. exhausted after a hard day.
a. really b. very c. rather d. quite
68. “I have never been to America”, she ……….. to me.
a. told b. said c. asked d. begged
69. I thought the film ……….. interesting.
a. would be b. will be c. is d. has been
70. “I ……….. for the meal”, Mark asks.
a. will pay b. would pay c. pay d will be paying
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 3: Ways of socialising</b></i>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
<i>+ Read for specific information about The ways of socialising.</i>
<i>+ Be able to talk some back ground information of The ways of socialising.</i>
+ Give the Vietnamese equivalents to the following words and phrases.
+ Decide which of the three options below is the best title for the passage and answer the
questions of the lesson.
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
……….
<b>Time Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
5’ <b>I.Warm-up: Jumbled words</b>
- Write the words whose letters are in a
random order on the board.
- Divide the class into two teams. Ss from two
teams go to the board and write the correct
words.
- The team which writes correct words first
will be the winner.
1. osiacsilgin
2. fo
3. sawy
<i>Answer: 1 socialising , 2 of, 3 </i>
ways
<b>-</b> Have Ss guess the phrase of words above
Ways of socialising
Whole class
go to the board and write the
correct words.
15’
7’
<b>- Lead in: T asks Ss to open the textbook on </b>
page 31.
<i><b>T: Today we are going to learn Unit 3- Ways of</b></i>
<i><b>socialising- A: Reading</b></i>
<i><b>II. Before you read:</b></i>
- Ask students to look at the pictures, work in
pairs to ask and answer the questions
1. What are the people in the picture doing?
2. Can you guess what they say to each other?
3. What will you do / say if:
+ you want to get your teacher’s attention in
class?
+ you need to ask someone a question, but
they are busy
talking to someone else?
-Go around to offer help.
-Call on some Ss to present their answers and
elicits comments from other Ss. Give feedback
if necessary
<b>* Teaching Vocabulary:</b>
- T asks Ss to skim the passage and underline
the new words.
- T explains the new words.
<i>1. attract (v)</i>
<i>2. assistance(n) </i>
<i>3. whistle (v)</i>
<i>4. clap (v)</i>
<i>5. attention (n)</i>
<i>6. acceptable (a)</i>
<i>7.Compliment: (n): (synonym)</i>
<i> 8.Decent: ( adj) (situation)</i>
<i> 9.Appropriate: ( adj) ( translation)</i>
<i> 10.Kidding(n) ( situation)</i>
<i> 11.Signal (n): ( example)</i>
<i> 12.Marvellous: ( adj): ( synonym)</i>
- Ask Ss to give the Vietnamese equivalent (if
necessary).
- Read a new word three times. Ss listen and
repeat after the teacher.
<b>III. while you read</b>
<b>Task 1</b>
T writes these words on the board:
<i>- verbal (a)</i>
<i>- non-verbal (a)</i>
<i>- attract someone’s attention</i>
<i>- impolite (a) # polite (a)</i>
<i>- rude(a) # polite</i>
<i>- informality (adv) # formality</i>
<i>- approach (v)</i>
<i>- a slight nod will do</i>
Pairs work
Discuss
Answers
<i>1.In the pictures, people are </i>
<i>shaking hands and waving with </i>
<i>each other.</i>
<i>2.they may be greeting each other</i>
<i>3. - If we want to get our teacher’s </i>
<i>attention in class, we can raise our </i>
<i>hands slightly.</i>
<i> - If we need to ask someone a </i>
<i>question, but they are busy talking </i>
<i>to someone else, we can…</i>
skim the passage and underline the
new words.
give the Vietnamese equivalent
listen and repeat after the teacher.
Copy down
give the Vietnamese equivalent to
the following words and phrases.
5’
10’
-Ask Ss to give the Vietnamese equivalent to
the following words and phrases.
-Instruct Ss to read the passage quickly and stop
at the words to guess their meanings.
-Guess the meaning of the words based on the
context in the sentences.
-Check that Ss understand the word correctly.
-Call some students to give the answers.
- Ask others students to correct.
- Give the true answers..
<b>Task 2</b>
-Ask students to read the questions carefully.
- Ask students to read through the passage
again.
- Devide the class into pairs to do .
- Call some students to give the answers.
- Ask others students to correct.
- Give the true answers..
<b>Task 3</b>
<b>Questions and answers </b>
Ask Ss to work in pairs and ask and answer the
questions in the book basing on the information
in the reading passage.
- Ask Ss to read the text again and write down
the answers to the following questions.
- T moves around class to give help.
<b> -call on some pairs to present their answers </b>
<b>in front of the class</b>
<b>-give correct answers</b>
<i><b>IV.After you read:</b></i>
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to discuss the meaning
Present answers
<i>- verbal (a): </i>
<i>- non-verbal (a); </i>
<i>- attract someone’s attention: thu </i>
<i>hút sự chú ý của ai.</i>
<i>- impolite (a) # polite (a): không </i>
<i>lịch sự</i>
<i>- rude(a) # polite: thô tục </i>
<i>- informality (adv) # formality: c</i>
<i>- approach (v): tiếp cận </i>
<i>- a slight nod will do: </i>
Work in pairs
Read the passage more carefully &
choose the best title for it.
Answers
<i><b>A. ( Attracting Attention: Non- </b></i>
<i><b>verbal Cues) </b></i>
work in pairs and ask and answer
the questions in the book basing on
the information in the reading
passage.
Answers
<b> 1. We can use either verbal or </b>
non- verbal communication.
2. Because they are strong
actions that can easily be seen
3. We can wait until he passes
near us, catch his eye, nod slightly
to let him know we would like him
to come to our table. Or we may
raise our hand slightly to show that
we need assistance.
4.You can use a small friendly
wave to attract his or her attention.
5. Because it’s considered rude.
3’
of whisling and hand- clapping in Vietnamese
culture.
- Move around to help Ss.
- Ask some pairs to act out their conversation.
- T gives feedback.
<i><b>. Homework:</b></i>
-asks Ss to learnt by heart the lesson
- Review the points that have been covered in
the lesson and do the exercise in the exercise
book.
- prepare the next part: Speaking
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 3: Ways of socialising</b></i>
<b>Lesson 2: Speaking</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
+ Practise speaking exactly and appropriately about the ways of socialising, based on the
vocabulary and structures that they have learnt in the lesson.
+ Make dialogues to practise giving and responding to compliments, based on the given
information.
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
Method: mainly communicative
……….
<b>Time Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
10’ <i><b>I.Warm-up:</b></i>
<b>Guessing word:</b>
<i>T: What is it?</i>
Divide the class into two groups.
T says that he has a word in his mind and he going
to give some information about the word.
Members of each group will listen and may stop at
any information they hear to guess what the word
is. Each group has only two chances to gues the
word. The first group to tell exactly what the word
is wins the game.
T gives information about the word.
<i>1. It’s a noun.</i>
<i>2. It has got ten letters.</i>
<i>3. It is an expression by word or action, or </i>
<i>admiration.</i>
<i>4. It shows one respect, give and respond </i>
<i>your feeling about things which are </i>
Listen to the
teacher.
Work in groups
10’
7’
<i>beautiful, good, or interesting, etc.</i>
<b>What is the word?</b>
T gives the correct answer.
Answer key: COMPLIMENT
<i><b>II.</b></i> <i><b>Pre- speaking:</b></i>
<b>Task 1:</b>
- <i>Introduces the task: You are going to work in </i>
<i>your group to practise reading these </i>
<i>dialogues, paying attention to how people give</i>
<i>and respond to compliments in each situation.</i>
Elicit the new words by asking Ps.
<b>Vocabulary:</b>
- <i>compliments(n)</i>
- <i>hairstyle(n)</i>
- <i>terrific(a)</i>
- <i>kidding(a)</i>
Ask Ps to take notes and practise reading
vocabulary.
Ask Ps to work in pairs, practise reading these
dialogues, paying attention to how people give
and respond to compliments in each situation.
T reads once. Ask Ps to listen.
Hang the table on the board. Ask Ps to look at the
information about compliments in the table.
<i><b>Give compliments</b></i> <i><b>Respond to </b></i>
<i><b>compliments</b></i>
- <i>beautiful</i>
- <i>perfect</i>
- <i>I’ve never seen…</i>
- <i>terrific</i>
- <i>better</i>
<i>I think</i>
<b>-What a/an……you </b>
have/ have got!
<b>-How + </b>
adj/adv…………
<b>-You really </b>
have………
<b>-Your ……is/are…</b>
- <i>Thank you/ </i>
<i>Thanks</i>
- <i>That’s a nice </i>
<i>compliment</i>
<i>I think</i>
I’m glad you like it.
Thank you. I think/
thought………
Thank you. That’s a
nice compliment.
You must
have got to
be kidding.
-Ask Ss to use the information in the table to
suitable information and play the roles in the
dialogues to practise the dialogues.
-Move around to give help
<i><b>III.While- speaking:</b></i>
<i><b>Task 2:</b></i>
-Read the cues once. Ask Ss to listen and look at
the information in the task.
-Explain the situations of each dialogues.
Work in pairs
- Look at the table on
the board.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Take notes.
use the information in the
table to suitable
information and play the
roles in the dialogues to
practise the dialogues.
8’
10’
-Guide Ss to use suitable compliments in each
dialogues, using the cues.
-Ask Ss to work in pairs, practise giving
compliments to suit the responses.
Move around to give help.
-Call on some pairs to act out their conversation in
front of the class.
-Give comments on their conversations.
<i><b>Task 3</b></i>
-Read the cues once. Ask Ss to listen and look at
the information in the task.
-Explain the situations of each dialogues.
Ask Ss to work in pairs, practise responding
compliments to suit the responses.
Move around to give help.
<b>-Call on some pairs to act out their conversation in</b>
front of the class.
-Give comments on their conversations.
<b>IV.</b> <b>Post speaking</b>
<i><b>Task 4:</b></i>
-Before getting Ss to discuss, T reminds them of
some useful expressions for giving and responding
compliments in Task 1.
-Divide the class into small groups of 3 or 4 &
gets them to discuss the task.
-Go around to check and offer help.
-After checking that all the groups have finished,
T calls on the representative of each group to
report their peer’ ideas. T check if other groups
would have the same or different ideas.
- Listen & take note of their errors. T provides
corrective feedback after that.
<b>Home work</b>
Work with your friends: Make compliments and
responses about something or performances of
your friends in class.
- Some pairs perform.
Others listen to.
David: You really have a
beautiful dress. It is the most
beautiful dress I have seen.
Hung: Your motorbike is really
terrific. Then…
Michel: I Though your
badminton was a lot better ….
- Work in groups.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Listen to the teacher.
act out their conversation
in front of the class.
- Thank you, Phil. I think you
can do it as well as I do.
nice compliment.
You must be kidding. I think it is
acceptable
Work in pairs
Share with the other pairs.
Present the dialogues
Take note teacher’s feedback
A nice pair of glasses:
A: Your pair of glasses are
really nice. I really like them.
B: Really, Peter. I just bought
it yesterday.
A new and expensive watch;
A: You really have a new and
expensive watch, ……… How
did you get it?
B: Thank you, ……… My
father bought it for me on my
birthday.
A new cell phone:
A: Your new cell phone looks
great. I have never seen such a
nice one before.
- study
- speaking English
- singing
- briefcase/ a new pen/ a nice hat/
-Prepare the next part.
suitable one for me
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>Unit 3: Ways of socialising</b>
<b>Lesson 3: Listening</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
- Develop extensive listening skills.
- Use the information they have listened to for other communicative tasks..
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
<b>time</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
5’
10’
<b>I. WARM UP:</b>
<i><b> Jumbled words:</b></i>
Write the words whose letters are in a
random order on the board.
- Divide the class into two teams. Ss from
two teams go to the board and write the
correct words.
- The team which writes correct words first
will be the winner.
aniotuergl regulation
oenetlehp telephone
acidev advice.
<i><b>II .Before you listen:</b></i>
<i>T sets the scene: You are going to listen to </i>
<i>Linda Cupple, a social worker, advises </i>
<i>young people on how to use the telephone in </i>
<i>her family. Listen to her talk and decide </i>
<i>whether the statements are true(T) or false </i>
<i>(F).</i>
Ask Ps to look at the pictures in the textbook
and answer the questions.
Elicit the new words by asking questions,
using the techniques suggested above.
<b>Vocabulary:</b>
- <i>argument(n)</i>
- <i>regulation(n)</i>
Pairs work
Rearrange
Whole class
Listen to the teacher
look at the pictures in the textbook
and answer the questions.
Answer the teacher's questions.
+ They are greeting….
10’
10’
10’
- <i>absolute(a)</i>
- <i>maximum(n,a)</i>
- <i>install(v)</i>
- <i>chitchat(n)</i>
- <i>starling(a)</i>
<b>Listen and repeat:</b>
-Help Ss to pronounce the words in their
book correctly.
-Play the tape and then ask Ss to repeat after
the tape in chorus and individually.
- T corrects errors, if any.
-Check that Ss know the meaning of these
words.
<i><b>III. While you listen:</b></i>
<i><b>Task 1:</b></i>
-Get Ss to read through the statements to
understand them and underline the key
words.
-Guide students the requests of the task.
- Let students listen twice time.
- Write on board from 1 to 6 and call some
students to come and write their answers.
- Let them listen on again and correct.
- Correct.
<i><b>Task 2: Gap- fill</b></i>
<i>T: Now listen to the rest of the listening text </i>
<i>again and work in pairs to write the missing </i>
<i>words. You will listen to the tape twice.</i>
Check if Ps can answer the questions in task
2 without listening again. Play the tape for
them to listen again but before doing this, T
should encourage Ps to read through all the
questions, identify the information they need
to look for in each question
Play the tape again for Ps to listen & answer
Get Ps to check their answers with a partner.
Then T checks with the whole class.
Play the tape twice.
Call on some pairs to give the answers.
Go over the answers with the class.
<i><b>IV.After you listen:</b></i>
-Before getting Ss to summarize Ms Linda
Take notes
Listen to the tape and read in chorus
& individually
Individual work, pair work & whole
class.
read through all the questions,
identify the information they need to
look for in each question ( question
word: what, where, when, how…)
listen and answer the questions
answers
1. T
2. F
Individual work, pair work & whole
class.
read through all the questions, identify
the information they need to look for
in each question
check their answers with a partner
give the answers.
Cupple’s talk, T reminds them of some useful
languages Task 1,2.
<i>Suggested ideas:</i>
<b> - Length of time for each call</b>
- Time for calling
- Calling late at night
- Calling at weekend
-Divide the class into small groups of 3 or 4
-Go around to check and offer help.
-After checking that all the groups have
finished, T calls on the representative of each
group to report their peer’ ideas. T check if
other groups would have the same or
different ideas.
-Listen & take note of their errors. T
provides corrective feedback after that.
<i><b>.Homework:</b></i>
- Learn the new words by heart.
- Review the points that have been covered in
the lesson and do the exercise in the exercise
book
- Prepare the next part.
4. adults 8. to stick
Individual work, pair work & whole
class.
summarize Ms Linda Cupple’s talk
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>Unit 3: Ways of socialising</b></i>
<b>Lesson 4: Writing</b>
<b>A.OBJECTIVES: </b>
By the end of the lesson, students will:
+ Be able to use the words to build complete sentences in Task 1,
+ Put the jumbled sentences in their correct order and then rearrange them to write the
complete paragraphs in Task 2.
<b>B. TEACHING AIDS: </b>
textbook, pictures, cassette, tape, handouts and real objects
<b>C. PROCEDURE:</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
5’ <b>I.</b> <b>Warm –up MATCHING </b>
-give the table on the board and asks sts to
match them in correct orders.
a.pointing at
someone
c.making mistakes
d.being into the
farewell
1. saying goodbye
2.admitting
one’swrongdoing
3.saying“I’m sorry
I’m late ”
4. being rule and
impolite
-check mistakes
Sts think what T asks, give their
key.
Sts correct .
15’
20’
Pre-teach: Vocabulary
- abruptly
- (to) apologize
- discourtesy
- Gosh
- sorrow
- pleasant and thoughtful
- Ask Ss to give the Vietnamese equivalent (if
necessary).
- Read a new word three times. Ps listen and
repeat after the T.
II.pre-writing
Task1: Use the words to make sentences.
Change the form of the verb.( No addition or
omission is required)
- introduce the aims of tasks in writing lesson.
In task 1,T asks sts to discuss how to use
suggested words in sentences.
- go around the class to help sts if necessary.
- ask sts to show their key.T gives key to
check
<b>III.While writing</b>
-Ask Ps to work in pairs or in group to read
- Ask Ss to compare their answers in pairs and
read aloud in front of the class.
- Ask Ps to read their answers.
- Listen to Ps and collect their mistakes for
indirect correction.
<b>Checking </b>
- T correct with Ps.
- T gives feedback on Ps’ work.
- T points out some common mistakes made
by Ps.
- Ask Ps to give comments on the others’
writing.
1. C 2. E 3. B 4. A 5. D
Look at the board, listen to the
teacher and take notes
give the Vietnamese equivalent (if
necessary).
- Read a new word three times,
listen and repeat after the T.
Sts listen, repeat and copy them.
Sts rewrite some words.
Sts know what they are going to
learn.
Sts work in pairs and dis -cuss how
to make senten -ces with re -quired
words.
Sts compare their key and show
them.
Sts correct .
<b>Key:</b>
1.There are many ways to tell
someone goodbye, and most of
them depend on the situation at
hand.
2.However, there is one rule that all
situations observe: We seldom say
goodbye abruptly.
3.In English it is necessary to
prepare a person for departure.
4.We lead into the farewell by
saying something pleasant and
thoughtful like “I’ve really enjoyed
talking to you”
5.We might also say something
relating to the time like“Gosh, I
can’t believe how late it is ! I really
must be going!”
work in pairs or in group to read and
discuss about the re-ordered
paragraphs.
5’
<i>1. The simplest way to apologize is to say “ </i>
<i>I’m sorry”.</i>
<i>2. Let’s take a common situation. Tom is late </i>
<i>for class and enters the classroom.</i>
<i>3. What does he do? The most polite actionis </i>
<i>usually to take a seat as quitely as possible </i>
<i>and apologize later.</i>
<i>4. But if the teacher stops and waits for him to</i>
<i>5. Naturally, more than this is needed, but it is</i>
<i>not the time for it because it has already </i>
<i>caused some interruption and doesn’t need to </i>
<i>make it any longer.</i>
<b>IV.Post-writing</b>
<b>Dicussion:</b>
Ask Ps to work in pair to discuss the question:
<i><b>- In what ways people tell someone goodbye?</b></i>
- Go around giving help.
- Ask some Ps to give their answers.
- Listen to Ps and collect their mistakes for
indirect correction.
<i><b>Homework:</b></i>
- Aks Ps to learnt by heart the lessson
- Review the points that have been covered in
the lesson and do the exercise in the exercise
book.
- Prepare for the next part.
<i><b>Paragraph 1:</b></i>
1. C 2. E 3. A 4. B 5. D
<i>1. It is difficult to write rules that </i>
<i>tell exactly when you should </i>
<i>apologize, but it is not difficult to </i>
<i>learn how.</i>
<i>2. If we have done something to hurt</i>
<i>someone’s feeling, we apologize.</i>
<i>3. An apology indicates that we </i>
<i>realize we’ve made a mistake, and </i>
<i>we’re sorry for it.</i>
<i>4. It’s a way of expressing our </i>
<i>regret or sorrow for something.</i>
<i>5. When we apologize, we admit our</i>
<i>wrongdoing or discourtesy, usually </i>
<i>a reason for it, and express regret.</i>
work in pair to discuss the question
give their answers.
<b> Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>UNIT FOUR: SCHOOL EDUCATION SYSTEM</b>
<b>A: READING</b>
<b> A. THE AIMS :</b>
- To practise Ss on reading skill and listening skill .
- To introduce Ss to School Education System in England .
<b> B. PREPARATION :</b>
1. Teacher :
- English 12 textbook.
- English 12 teacher’s book.
2. Students :
- English 12 textbook.
<b> C. THE TEACHING STEPS :</b>
<b> 1. Classroom procedure: ( 2 minutes )</b>
- greeting
<b> 2. Checking the previous lesson :</b>
* Teacher: _ To appoint two Ss to check the writing given .
_ To give some remarks .
<b>4. New lesson :</b>
Estimated
Time
Teacher’s activities Ss’ activities
BEFORE YOU READ
- To explain the meaning .
- To show Ss to complete the task
given .
- To show Ss to guess what the
meaning of passage is .
WHILE YOU READ
- To read the passage twice .
- To introduce new words :
* Academic / / (adj) of
education in school, universities, ect
… ---The academic year :năm học,
toàn bộ thời gian trong một năm
khi việc giảng dạy được tiến
hành ỡ trường học .
* Educate / / (v) to teach
sb over a period of time at school,
ect………
Ex : She was educated in France .
* Certificate / / (n) an
official written or printed statement
that may be used as proof or evidence
of certain facts.
Ex :an examination certificate (ie
proving that sb has passed an
examination .)
* Curriculum / / (n) the
subjects included in a course of study
or taught at a particular school,
college, ………..
Ex: Is Spanish on the curriculum at
your school ?.
- To listen to the teacher .
* WORK IN PAIRS
- To ask pairs of to complete the task
given, choosing True or False :
(1) T
(2) T
- To listen to the teacher .
- To have Ss read all new words in
chorus .
Each word is read twice .
__________ TASK 1 __________
- To show Ss to complete the task
given .
- To remind Ss to read the passage
learned once more before doing the
task supplied.
- To help Ss to finish the task given,
going around whole class .
- To correct Ss’ pronunciation .
_________ TASK 2 ___________
- To
- To use answer key on page 46,
English 12 teacher’s book.
-To help Ss to complete the task given,
going around whole class .
- To correct Ss’ pronunciation .
__________ TASK 3 ____________
- To explain its meaning .
- To show Ss to complete the task given
- To help Ss to finish the task given,
going around whole class .
- To use cues supplied on page,
English 12 teacher’s book .
silence .
- To listen to teacher .
- To appoint Ss to complete the task
given by oral drill :
(1) State school
(2) Primary school
(3) Second school
(4) Compulsory
(5) The General Certificate of
Second School
(6) Curriculum
(7) The General Certificate Of
Education Advanced Level or The
GCSA
“A Level”.
- To listen to the teacher .
* WORK IN PAIRS :
- To have pairs of Ss answer the
questions
supplied by oral drill .
- To write down answer key given
into their notebooks.
- To listen to the teacher .
-To have Ss complete the task supplied
by oral drill .
- To write down the answer key into
their notebooks .
AFTER YOU READ
- To show Ss to finish the task given .
- To listn to the teacher .
- To wrie down those words into their
notebooks :
(1) IELTS: International English
Language Tests .
(2) TOEFL: Test Of English as a
Second Language .
(3) FCE: First Certificate English .
(4) KET : Key English Tests
(5) PET: Preliminary English Tests
<b> 5. Home assignment :</b>
<b> - To remind Ss to practise reading the passage learned several times .</b>
- New lesson : Ss prepare new lesson : B. SPEAKING, from page 47 to page 48,
Unit Four, English 12 textbook .
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>UNIT FOUR: SCHOOL EDUCATION SYSTEM</b>
<b>B: SPEAKING</b>
<b> A. THE AIMS :</b>
<b>After the period, the students are able </b>
+ To practise Ss on speaking skill and reading skill .
+ To show Ss to askl and answer the questions about the School Education
System in Vietnam.
<b>B. PREPARATION :</b>
1 . Teacher :
_ English 12 textbook .
_ English 12 teacher’s book.
2. Students :
_ English 12 textbook .
<b>C. THE TEACHING STEPS :</b>
<b>1. Classroom procedure: ( 2 minutes )</b>
<b> - greeting .</b>
- checking the attendance .
<b>2. Checking the previous lesson: ( 7 minutes )</b>
<b> * Teacher :- appoints two Ss to check the reading, the vocabulary in the </b>
passage
<b> School Education System .</b>
Estimated
Time
Teacher’s activities Ss’ activities
__________ TASK 1_____________
- To show Ss to complete the task
- To help Ss to practise, going around
whole class .
- To encourage pairs of Ss to do well.
___________ TASK 2 ____________
- To explain the meaning .
- To show Ss to finish the task
supplied.
- To help Ss to talk about the topic
given
-To go around whole class .
- To have Ss complete the task given .
- To use cues in example, Task 1 .
* WORK IN GROUPS .
- To have Ss talk about the school
education system in Vietnam, using
the information from Task 1 .
<b>4. Consolidation :</b>
___________ TASK 3___________
- To show Ss to complete the task supplied
.
- To encourage Ss to give some
similarities and differences between the
school system in Vietnam and in England.
_ asks students to notice some points:
1. time
2. terms
3. the National curriculum
4. subjects taught in school
5. age
_ asks some students to present their talks
to the whole class.
_ ask some of them to give comments on
* WORK IN GROUPS :
- To listen to the teacher .
- To have Ss talk about similarities and
differences between the school system in
Vietnam and in England .
_ work in groups of fours to find the
information they need to complete the task
given.
_ some of them present their talks to the
whole class.
_ some of them give comments on their
friends’ talks.
<b>5. Home assignment: </b>
- To remind Ss to continue to write about the topic discussed at home .
- New lesson: Ss prepare new lesson : C. LISTENING, on page 46, Unit
Four,
English 12 textbook .
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>UNIT FOUR : SCHOOL EDUCATION SYSTEM</b>
<b>C: LISTENING</b>
<b>A. THE AIMS :</b>
- To practise Ss on listening skill and speaking skill .
<b> B. PREPARATION :</b>
1. Teacher :
- English 12 textbook .
<b> C. THE TEACHING STEPS :</b>
<b> 1. Classroom procedure : ( 2 minutes )</b>
- greeting .
- checking the attendance .
<b> 2. Checking the prvious lesson :</b>
* Teacher :- appoints two Ss to talk about some similarities and differences
between the school system in Vietnam and in England .
- gives some remarks .
1C81-A0K5-19E5-MAAX-400F-NGFB-480X
<b> 3. New lesson : </b>
ESTIMATED
TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES SS’ ACTIVITIES
BEFORE YOU LISTEN
- To explain the meaning .
- To show Ss to ask and answer the
questions supplied on page 46,
Unit Four
English 12 textbook .
- To correct Ss’ pronunciation .
- To show Ss to read all words
supplied on page 46, Unit Four,
English 12 textbook .
WHILE YOU LISTEN
_________ TASK 1 _________
- To explain the meaning .
- To show Ss to complete the task
provided .
- To read whole passage given
from page 49 to page 50, English
12 teacher’s book three times .
- To help Ss to complete the task
given, using answer key on page
49, English 12 teacher’s book.
- To show Ss to complete the task
given .
* WORK IN PAIRS .
- To listen to the teacher .
- To have pairs of Ss ask and answer
the questions supplied on page 46,
Unit Four, English 12 textbook .
- To read all words supplied on page
46, Unit Four, English 12 textbook .
Each word is read twice .
- To listen to the teacher .
- To have Ss read all questions
supplied on page 46, Unit Four,
English 12 textbook in silence .
- To have Ss complete the task
given .
- To write down answer key into
their notebooks .
- To listen to the teacher .
- To use answer key on page 50,
English 12 teacher’s book .
- To help Ss to complete the task
given, going around whole class .
- To correct Ss’ pronunciation .
English 12 textbook by oral drill .
<b> 4. Consolidation :</b>
AFTER YOU LISTEN
- To show Ss to finish the task given .
-To encourage pairs of Ss to finish
the exercise well .
- To write down answer key supplied
on page 50, English 12 teacher’s book
into their notebooks .
* WORK IN PAIRS :
- To have Ss complete the task given,
using ideas in Task 1 done .
<b> 5. Home assignment :</b>
- To remind Ss to practise talking to classmates about the studying at school
several times .
- New lesson: Ss prepare new lesson : D. WRITING, on page 47, Unit Four,
English 12 textbook .
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>UNIT FOUR: SCHOOL EDUCATION SYSTEM</b>
<b>D: WRITING</b>
<b> A. THE AIMS :</b>
<b> -To practise Ss on writing skill and speaking skill .</b>
<b> B. PREPARATION :</b>
<b> 1. Teacher :</b>
- English 12 textbook .
- English 12 teacher’s book .
2. Students :
- English 12 textbook .
<b> C. THE TEACHING STEPS :</b>
<b> 1. Classroom precedure: ( 2 minutes )</b>
- greeting .
- checking the attendance .
<b> 2. Checking the previous lesson :</b>
* Teacher: -Appoints two Ss to check the reading, the vocabulary: the passage
School Education System .
TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES SS’ ACTIVITIES
__________ TASK 1 ___________
- To explain the meaning .
- To show Ss to finish the exercise
supplied.
- To help Ss with the writing,
going around whole class .
- To apoint 3 groups of Ss to write
their own ideas on the blackboard.
- To correct Ss’ writing .
____________ TASK 2 _________
-To explain the meaning .
-To show Ss to achieve the task
provided.
- To suggest choosing three ideas
supplied to write the passage .
- To help Ss to finish the task
provided, going around whole class
.
* WORK IN GROUPS :
- To listen to the teacher .
- To have groups of Ss complete the
exercise given .
- To write rough draft .
- To have groups of Ss to finish the
writing, using cues given on page 47,
Task 1 .
- To listen to the teacher .
- To have Ss complete the task given,
using ideas done .
- To choose three ideas to complete the
writing .
<b>4. Consolidation :</b>
- To appoint Ss to express their own
- To correct Ss’ writing .
- To give some remarks .
- To ask Ss to write their own passage
on the blackboard
<b> 5. Home assignment :</b>
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b> A. THE AIMS :</b>
- To practise Ss on writing skill and reading skill .
- To show Ss how to use the passive voice .
<b> B. PREPARATION :</b>
1. Teacher :
- English 12 textbook .
- English 12 teacher’s book .
2. Students :
-English 12 textbook .
<b> C. THE TEACHING STEPS :</b>
<b> 1. Classroom procedure: (2 minutes )</b>
- greeting .
- checking the attendance .
<b> 2. Checking the previous lesson :</b>
<b> * Teacher: _ appoints two Ss to check the writing given last period .</b>
_ gives some remarks .
<b>3. New lesson :</b>
TIME TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES SS’ ACTIVITIES
____________ TASK 1 ______________
PRONUNCIATION
- To show Ss to read all words provided
on page 47, Unit Four, English 12
textbook.
- To show Ss to practise reading the
sentences provided from page 47 to page
48, Unit Four, English 12 textbook.
- To correct Ss’ pronunciation .
GRAMMAR
* Exercise 1:
-To explain the meaning .
- To show Ss to complete the exercise
given ..
- To remind Ss to do the exercise with
Simple Present Passive form:
S + is / are / + P.P of main verb +
…….
- To correct Ss’ pronunciation .
____________ TASK 3____________
* Exercise 2 :
- To explain the meaning .
- To listen to the teacher .
- To have Ss read all words provided on
page 47, Unit Four, English 12
textbook
Each word is read twice .
- To have Ss read the sentences provided
on page 47 to page 48, Unit Four, English
12 textbook . Each sentence is read twice .
- To appoint Ss to finish the exercise
given by oral drill :
(1) is divided
(2) is separated
(3) is set
(4) is made up
(5) is paid
(6) are selected
- To write down answer key into their
notebook .
- To listen to the teacher .
- To show Ss to finish the exercise
provided .
- To use answer key supplied on page
52,
English 12 textbook .
To help Ss to finish the exercise given,
going around whole class .
- To write answer key on the blackboard .
___________ TASK 4 ____________
* Exercise 3 :
- To explain its meaning .
- To show Ss to finish the exercise
proviede
- To use answer key on page 53, English
12 t
teacher’s book .
- To help Ss to finish the exercise given,
going around whole class .
read twice .
- To write down answer key into their
notebook .
- To listen to the teacher .
_ To read the text in silence .
- To appoint Ss to finish the exercise by
oral drill .
- To write down answer key into their
notebooks .
<b>4. Consolidation :</b>
_ Grammar note :
* Teacher asks Ss to write down grammar note into their notebook .
PASSIVE VOICE ( Thể thụ động )
A. Formula:
……….+ Be + P.P +
…………
B. các thể bị động ở các thì :
Passive tense
Simple Present Structuream/ is / are + P.P+……… ExampleEnglish is spoken here .
Present
Continuous am/ is / are being + P.P +…… The house is being painted .
Simple past was / were + P.P +…….. I wasn’t invited .
Past continuous was / were being + P.P +…….. I was being watched .
Present perfect have / has been +P.P +
………….
Has Mary been told ?
Past perfect had been + P.P +……… I has been forgotten .
Will future will be +P.P +……… You will be told soon .
Future perfect Will have been + P. P +
………… Everything will have been done by Tuesday.
Going to future Am / is / are going to be + P.P+ Who’s going to be invited ?
<b> 5. Home assignment :</b>
- To remind Ss to learn grammar note given by heart and practise the
exercises
supplied several times .
- New lesson : Ss prepare new lesson : Unit Five _ Higher Education,
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>Unit 5: Higher Education</b>
<b>A :Reading</b>
<b>I. Aims: To help students to practice:</b>
Guessing words’ meanings in contexts
Reading for details of information about application process for universities in the UK
Reading for gist and answer comprehension question
<b>II. Aids: textbooks, pictures, board, chalks</b>
<b>III. Procedure</b>
<b>stages </b>
<b>&time</b> <b>teacher’s activities</b> <b>students’ activities</b>
<b></b>
<b>Pre-reading</b>
(7 mins)
<b>+Warm-up</b> : Guessing game
( - Motivate students and arouse their
interest through the game.
- Using picture to catch students’
attention)
-Call on an S to go to the board and
give a picture to him/her. Don’t let
the others see it.
-Tell the class the rules of the game.
<i>-Everybody makes yes/no questions </i>
<i>to guess the answer of your friend’s </i>
<i>question.</i>
-Observer students playing game
<b>+Lead-in: </b>
-Ask students to look at 3 pictures in
their books and work in pairs to
answer the questions:
<i>-How do you say in English the </i>
<i>names of these universities?</i>
<i> </i>
- One S goes to the board, gets the
picture and doesn’t let others see it.
-The S leads the game by asking the
others:
<i>- Which university is it in the picture?</i>
-The others make yes/no questions
<b>Possible questions:</b>
<i>-Are students in this university trained </i>
<i>-Is the university in Hanoi?</i>
<i>-Is it…university?</i>
-The S answers the questions using only
yes or no. The game is over if an S
guess the right university.
-All the students look at the picture to
check.
-Work in pairs and look at the pictures
in their books to answer the questions
<b>Expected answers:</b>
<i>1.Hue University</i>
<i>2.Hanoi University of Natural Science</i>
<i>3. Hanoi University of Architecture</i>
<i>-Which of them would you like to </i>
<i>apply to?</i>
<i>-I would like to apply to Hanoi </i>
<i>University of Science because I like </i>
<i>studying mathematics.</i>
<b>While </b>
<b>reading</b>
-Ask students to spend 5 mins
reading the text silently, trying to
catch the main ideas of the text.
-Ask students to read the text again
and underline words and phrases that
describe the requirements and
application process to the universities
in the UK.
<b>Task 1:</b>
-Ask students to work in pairs and
guess the meanings of some new
words in task 1 basing on the
contexts in the reading text, then fill
in the blanks.
-Call some students to read aloud
their answers and ask the others to
listen and comment
-Give T’s own remarks and
corrections if necessary.
<b>Task 2:</b>
-Ask the whole class to read through
the sentences then choose the best
options trying not to refer to the text
as much as possible
-Ask them to work in pairs,
comparing their answers
-Call some students to read aloud
their answers
-Listen to students’ answer and give
remarks
<b>Task 3:</b>
-Ask the whole class to read
carefully all the application process
to tertiary study in the UK then do
task 3 individually.
-Ask students to work in pairs,
exchange their answers with their
partners.
-Call some students to give their
answers
-Listen to students’ answers and
-Read the text carefully in 5 mins and
catch its main ideas.
-Read the text again and underline
words and phrases that describe the
requirements and application process to
the universities in the
UK.
-Work in pairs, guessing the words’
meanings and fill in the blanks with
their correct forms
-Some students read aloud their
answers, others listen to their friends
and comment correct if necessary.
<b>Expected answers:</b>
1.applications 6.required
2. applied 7.requiremennts
3. applicants 8.decided
4. prefer 9.decision
5. preference 10.decisive
-Read through the sentences then
choose the best options trying not to
refer to the text as much as possible
-Work in pairs and compare their
answers.
-Some students read aloud their
answers; others listen and give their
comments.
<b> Expected answers:</b>
<b>1 2</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b> <b>5</b>
<b>C</b> <b>C</b> <b>B</b> <b>B</b> <b>A</b>
- Read carefully all the application
process to tertiary study in the UK then
put a tick if the information mentioned
in the text or put a cross if not.
answers.
-While some read their answers aloud;
others listen and give their corrections
or comments
<b>Expected answers:</b>
<b>1 2</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b> <b>5</b> <b>6</b>
<b>D</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>E</b> <b>F</b> <b>B</b>
<b></b>
<b>Post-reading (8 </b>
mins)
<b>Homework</b>
-Ask the whole class work in groups
of four and discuss the question:
<i>+How importance is tertiary study to</i>
<i>you?</i>
-Walk around to encourage students
to express their opinions and give
some suggestions to students :
+It is important in gaining
knowledge
+It is important in your future jobs
- Ask some groups to make
discussion on the question in front of
the class
-Give comments
-Ask students to write paragraph on
how important tertiary study is to
them.
-Form groups of four and discuss the
question of how importance tertiary
study is to them.
-Ask T if there is any trouble
- Some groups make discussion on the
question in front of the class; other give
comments
<b>Expected opinions:</b>
-I think that tertiary study is very
important to us because we can widen
our knowledge through
-I think that tertiary study is a good
preparation for us to get a good job in
the future
-Take note the homework
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>B :Speaking</b>
Talking about application process to tertiary study in Vietnam
Asking and answering about time of application process to tertiary study in Vietnam
<b>II. Aids: textbooks, pictures, board, chalks</b>
<b>III. Procedure</b>
<b>stages </b>
<b>&time</b>
<b></b>
<b>Pre-speaking</b>
(5 mins)
<b>Warm-up: what is my job?</b>
-Call on an S to go to the board and
ask him/her to choose a job that he/she
wants to do in the future and mime a
typical activity which it involves.
-Ask the whole class to look at their
friend’s activity then ask him/her
yes/no question to guess his/her job
-Observe students playing game and
stop when there is a winner
- One S goes to the board, chooses a job
that he/she wants to do in the future and
<i>- What is my job?</i>
-The others watch his/her activity and
make yes/no questions to guess the job
<b>Possible questions:</b>
<i>-Are you mending something?</i>
<i>-Are you typing?</i>
<i>-Do you work outside?</i>
-The S answers the questions using only
yes or no. The game is over if an S guess
the job.
<b>While </b>
<b>speaking</b>
(38
mins)
<b>Task 1</b>
-Call an S to read aloud the request of
the task
-Ask the whole class to do task 1
-Ask students to exchange their
answers with their friends.
-Call some students to read aloud their
answers to the class
-Give corrections and remarks.
-The teacher elicits the meaning of
these application process for students
to guess
<b>Task 2</b>
-Ask students to work in pairs, reading
thee information in their books, asking
and answering the question about the
application process to tertiary study in
Vietnam
-Walk around to observe students
talking and help them if necessary.
-Call some pairs to stand up and ask &
answer. Ask other pairs to listen and
comment
-Make necessary correction and
comments
-One S read aloud the request of the task
- some students to read aloud their
answers to the class; others listen and
comment
<b>Expected answers:</b>
an application form
an identify card
a copy of the originals of school
certificate
a birth certificate
a copy of records of your performance
ay school
scores of the required examination.
<b>Possible problems:</b>
-Students may don’t know the meanings
of some application process
-Work in pairs
-Read information in their books and
practise asking and answering questions
about the application process to tertiary
study in Vietnam
-Ask T if necessary
<b>Task 3:</b>
-Introduce the task to the students ask
them to work in groups of four
-Ask students to make discussion and
take note
-Go around and help them if necessary
-Call some groups to handle their
notes among the groups and check.
-Call on some groups to stand up and
make discussion in front of the class.
Ask other groups listen and give
comments
-Give T’s own comments
-T goes around to remind students to
use English and suggest some difficult
structures
<b>Expected pair work: </b>
<i>S1: When do you fill in and send the </i>
<i>application form?</i>
<i>S2: In March</i>
<i>S1: When do you take the GCSE </i>
<i>examination?</i>
<i>S2: in May.</i>
…
- Listen to the instruction and form
groups of four
-Discuss and write the process of
applying to a tertiary institution in
Vietnam
-Ask T if necessary
-Handle their notes among the groups
and check.
-Some groups in turn stand up and make
their discussion in front of the class;
other groups listen and give comments
<b>Expected group work: </b>
<i>S1: I think the first process of applying </i>
<i>to a tertiary institution in Vietnam is to </i>
<i>fill in and send the application form.</i>
<i>S2: Yes, then we must take the GCSE </i>
<i>examination</i>
<i>S3: Only when we pass the GCSE </i>
<i>examination, can we take the entrance </i>
<i>exam. It often takes place in July.</i>
….
<b>Possible problems:</b>
-Students may speak Vietnamese while
discussing.
<b></b>
<b>Post-speaking</b>
(2 mins)
<b>-Ask students to write a paragraph </b>
about the process of applying to a
tertiary institution in Vietnam
-Take note their home work
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Class:. . .
<b>C :Listening</b>
Develop the ability to get details from listening text to do true/false and multiple
choice exercises.
Get detailed information on some problems students may have when studying in a
foreign country.
<b>II. Aids: textbooks, cassette, tape recorder, board, chalks</b>
<b>III. Procedure</b>
<b>Time </b> <b>teacher’s activities</b> <b>students’ activities</b>
<b></b>
<b>Pre-listening</b>
(7 mins)
<b>Warm-up: interview </b>
-Ask students form pairs and give
them instructions:
<i>-Imagine that in each pair, one of </i>
<i>you is a Vietnamese student studying</i>
<i>in a foreign country; the other ask </i>
<i>her/him problems facing students </i>
-Call some pairs to report their
interviews
-Give remarks and leads to listening
task
<b>+Pre-teach</b>
-Introduce the new words that will
appear in the listening task and elicit
the meanings
-Read these words aloud and ask
students to read them in chorus and
individually
- Students form pairs and listen to T’s
instructions
-Work in pairs, asking and answering
the problems facing students when
studying in a foreign country
<b>Possible questions:</b>
<i>S1: What problem you have to face </i>
<i>when studying in America? </i>
<i>S2: there are many problems such as: </i>
-some pairs report their interviews;
other pairs listen and give comments
-Listen to T and guess the meanings of
these words
-Practise reading the words in chorus
and individually.
<b>While </b>
<b>listening</b>
(25 mins)
<b>task1</b>
-Ask students to carefully read all the
statements silently in 1 minute
-Play the record and ask students to
listen for main ideas of the text
-Play the record again and ask them
to do the task
-Ask students to compare their
answers with their friends
-Call some students to give their
answers
-T listen to and correct or comment
<b>Task 2:</b>
Ask all students to spend 2 mins to
read the questions and options in the
task
-Play the record once again and ask
students to do the task
-Ask students to work in pairs to
exchange their answers
- Read all the statements carefully
in 1 minute
-Listen to the record for the main ideas
of the text
-Listen again and tick true or false in
their books
-Check their answers with their friends
-Some students give their answers;
others listen and give comments
<b>Expected answers:</b>
<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b> <b>5</b>
<b>T</b> <b>T</b> <b>T</b> <b>F</b> <b>T</b>
-Ask some students to read aloud
their answers
-Listen and give remarks. T can play
the record again if students cannot
give correct answers
-Listen to the record again and choose
the best option
-Work in pairs and exchange their
answers
-Some students read aloud their answers
; others listen and give comments
1 2 3
C C B
<b></b>
<b>Post-listening</b>
(13 mins)
<b>Homework</b>
<b>-Ask students to read the request </b>
aloud
-Ask them to work in pairs again,
asking and answering the questions
of the task
-Go around and help students if
necessary
-Call some pairs to perform their
dialogues
-Listen and give remarks or good
marks if students do well
-Ask students to write a paragraph
about whether they like to do an
undergraduate course in Vietnam or
abroad and the reasons for that
choice
-One student read the request aloud
-Work in group again and practise
asking and answering the questions of
the task
-Ask T if necessary
-Some pairs stand up talking in front of
the class; others listen and give
comments
<b>Possible dialogue: </b>
<i>S1: Would you like to do an </i>
<i>undergraduate course in Vietnam or </i>
<i>abroad?</i>
<i>S2: I’d like to do an undergraduate </i>
<i>course in Vietnam </i>
<i>S1: Why so?</i>
<i>S2: Because my English is not good </i>
<i>enough and I cannot afford tuition fees </i>
<i>and accommodation for studying </i>
<i>overseas. </i>
-Take note their homework
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>D :Writing</b>
<b>I. Aims: To help students:</b>
Practice writing short passage about the problems that Vietnamese students may
encounter when studying abroad.
Using main ideas from discussion to write a passage.
<b>II. Aids: textbooks, board, chalks</b>
<b>III. Procedure</b>
<b>&time</b>
<b></b>
<b>Pre-writing</b>
(5 mins)
<b>Lead-in : </b>
-Ask students:
<i>-Do you want to study abroad? Why or </i>
<i>why not?</i>
-Call some students to answer then give
remarks
-Listen to the T’s question
- Some students answer T’s question.
Students can exchange their opinions with
their friends
<b> Possible answers :</b>
<b>-Yes, I want to study abroad because the </b>
learning environment there is better than in
Vietnam.
-No. I don’t want to study abroad because the
cost of studying and living there ix much
higher in Vietnam...
<b>While </b>
<b>writing</b>
(37
mins)
<b>Task 1:</b>
-Ask one S to read aloud the request of
task 1
-Ask students to work in groups of four
discussing and taking notes the problems
they may face when studying abroad.
-Walk around to observe students’
activities and help them if necessary
-Call some groups to make discussion in
front of the class.
-Give corrections if necessary and remarks.
<b>Task 2:</b>
- Ask one S to read aloud the request of
task 2
-Ask all students to write a passage about
the problems that Vietnamese students may
encounter when studying abroad basing on
the idea in task 1
-T may call 1 or 2 students to write his/her
passage directly on the board
-Walk around help students if necessary
.Ask them to pay attention to such linking
words as first, second, etc.
-Ask all students to look at the board and
correct their friend’s writings
-Give T’s own comments and corrections
- One S read aloud the request of task 1
-Form groups of four and discuss and take
notes the problems they may face when
studying abroad.
-Ask T if necessary
- Some groups make discussion in front of
the class; others listen and give comments
S1: I think English language s the first
problem we will face while studying abroad.
We learn English in our country but we don’t
have chance to speak English with native
people.
S2: The second problem is learning styles at
tertiary level.We are not familiar with
independent learning and modern study
facilities.
…
-One S read aloud the request of task 2
-Do task 2: write a passage about the
problems that Vietnamese students may
encounter when studying abroad basing on
the idea in task 1
-1 or 2 students write his/her passage directly
on the board
-Ask if necessary.
-Pay attention to such linking words as first,
second, etc.
- Look at the board and correct their friend’s
writings on the board
<b></b>
<b>post-writing</b>
(3 mins)
<b>Homework</b>
-Ask students to correct their writing at
home.
-Take note homework
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>E :LANGUAGE FOCUS</b>
<b>I. Aims:</b>
Pronunciation: students practise pronouncing stress of more than three-syllable words
Grammar: students study the structure as well as the usage of conditional sentences
Vocabulary: students learn to use words relating to the topic application process to
tertiary study and some abbreviations of some main high school exams
<b>II. Aids: textbooks, board, chalks</b>
<b>II.</b> <b>Procedure</b>
<b>III.</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>teacher’s activities</b> <b>students’ activities</b>
<b>Pronun </b>
<b>ciation</b>
(10 mins)
1.Listen and repeat
-Read the words in the textbook or
play the record once or twice.
-Read and ask students to repeat in
chorus then individually or in pairs
-Call some students to read the words
aloud
-Listen and correct if necessary
2.Practice reading the sentences
-Read the sentences once or twice
then ask students to practise reading
in pairs
-Call some students to read the
sentences aloud.
-Listen, correct if necessary and ask
students to practise more at home
-Listen to the pronunciation of the
words
-Listen and then repeat in chorus then
individually
-Some students read the words aloud;
others listen and correct if there are
mispronunciation
-Listen to the teacher and practise
reading the sentences in pairs
-Some students read the sentences
aloud; others listen and correct if
necessary
<b>Grammar </b>
<b>and </b>
<b>vocabulary</b>
<b>(35mins)</b>
Exercise 1:
-Ask students to read the request of
task 1 carefully and do the task
-Walk around to help students if
necessary
-Ask students to compare their
-Call some students to read out the
answers
-Give correction or comments if
necessary
-Read read the request of task 1
carefully and do the task
-Ask T if there is any trouble
-Compare compare their answers with
their friends’
-Some students read out the answers;
other give corrections
<b>Suggested answers:</b>
Exercise 2:
-Ask students to read the request of
task 1 carefully and do the task
-Walk around to help students if
necessary
-Ask students to compare their
answers with their friends’
-Call some students to read out the
answers
-Give correction or comments if
necessary
Exercise 3:
-Ask students to read the request of
task 1 carefully and do the task
-Walk around to help students if
necessary
-Ask students to compare their
answers with their friends’
-Call some students to read out the
answers
-Give correction or comments if
necessary
not be able to take the en trance exam
to the university.
2. You won’t be able to get into the
exam room if you are 10 minutes late.
3. If you don’t send the application
form on time, you will not be able to
4. If you don’t have a reference letter,
you won’t be able to submit your
application form.
5. Unless you show your identify card,
you won’t be able to get into the exam
room.
-Read read the request of task 1
carefully and do the task
-Ask T if there is any trouble
-Compare compare their answers with
their friends’
-Some students read out the answers;
other give corrections
<b>Suggested answers:</b>
1. If she had a car, she would go out in
the evening
2. If Sarah liked school, she would
study hard.
3. I would/could do the test if it were
4. Peter would read a lot if he had more
time
5. If I spoke Korean, I would translate
it.
6. If they weren’t afraid of flying, they
would study abroad.
-Read read the request of task 1
carefully and do the task
-Ask T if there is any trouble
-Compare compare their answers with
their friends’
-Some students read out the answers;
other give corrections
<b>Suggested answers:</b>
time, they might have called for you an
interview .I can’t understand why you
didn’t.
3. If John had installed an alarm, the
thieves wouldn’t have broken into his
4. I would have made a film with him if
I had been a famous director
5.Had you told me earlier, I would
have given it to you
6.We would have sent you a Christmas
card if we had had your address
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>Unit 6: Future jobs</b>
<b>A :READING</b>
<b>I. Aims: To help students to practicse:</b>
Guessing words’ meanings in contexts
Reading for details of information about job interview.
Reading for gist to make discussion
<b>II. Aids: textbooks, pictures, board, chalk</b>
<b>III. Procedure</b>
<b>TIME</b> <b>TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES</b> <b>STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES</b>
<b></b>
<b>pre-reading</b>
(7 mins)
<b>Warm-up: Guessing game</b>
-Call on an S to go to the board and
give a picture to him/her. Don’t let the
others see it.
-Tell the class the rules of the game.
<i>-Everybody makes yes/no questions to </i>
<i>guess the answer of your friend’s </i>
<i>question.</i>
-Observer students playing game
<b>+Lead-in: </b>
-Ask students to look at the pictures in
their books and work in pairs to answer
the question:
<i>-What do they do?</i>
<i> </i>
- One S goes to the board, gets the
<i>- Which university is it in the picture?</i>
-The others make yes/no questions
<b>Possible questions:</b>
<i>-Are students in this university trained to</i>
<i>be teachers?</i>
<i>-Is the university in Hanoi?</i>
<i>-Is it…university?</i>
-The S answers the questions using only
yes or no. The game is over if an S guess
the right university.
-All the students look at the picture to
check.
-Ask students to work in groups of four
to tick the factors that they think would
help them succeed in a job interview.
-Ask some groups to report their
answers
-Give T’s own comments
<i>1.He is a waiter</i>
<i>2.He is a mechanic</i>
<i>3. She is a farmer</i>
<i>4. She is a teacher</i>
<i>5.He is a doctor</i>
<b>- Form groups of four and tick the factors</b>
that they think would help them succeed
in a job interview.
-Some groups report their answers;
others listen and comment
<b>Possible answers:</b>
giving clear, honest answers]
feeling self-confident
having good sense of humor
<b>While </b>
<b>reading</b>
(25
mins)
-Ask students to spend 5 mins reading
the text silently, trying to catch the
main ideas of the text.
-Ask students to read the text again and
-Ask students to work in pairs and
guess the meanings of some new words
in task 1 basing on the contexts in the
reading text, then circle the options
-Call some students to read aloud their
answers and ask the others to listen and
comment
-Give T’s own remarks and corrections
if necessary.
<b>Task 2:</b>
-Ask the whole class to read through
the sentences then decide whether the
statement are true or false
-Ask them to work in pairs, comparing
their answers
-Call some students to read aloud their
answers
-Listen to students’ answer and give
remarks
-Read the text carefully in 5 mins and
catch its main ideas.
-Read the text again and underline words
and phrases that help people to succeed
in job interviews
-Work in pairs, guessing the words’
meanings and circle the options
-Some students read aloud their answers,
others listen to their friends and
comment correct if necessary.
<b>Expected answers:</b>
<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b>
<b>B</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>B</b>
-Read through the sentences then decide
whether the statement are true or false
-Work in pairs and compare their
answers.
-Some students read aloud their answers;
others listen and give their comments.
<b>suggested answers:</b>
<b> 5.T 6.F 7.F 8.T</b>
<b>Post-reading</b>
(13
mins)
<b>Home- </b>
<b>work</b>
-Ask the whole class work in groups of
four and discuss the question:
<i>+Which pieces of advice given in the </i>
<i>passage do you find most useful and </i>
<i>least useful? Why?</i>
-Walk around to encourage students to
express their opinions and give some
suggestions to students
- Ask some groups to make discussion
on the question in front of the class
-Give comments
-Ask students to write paragraph on
how important tertiary study is to them.
-Form groups of four and discuss the
question of the usefulness of the advice
given in the passage
<b>-Ask T if there is any trouble </b>
<b>- Some groups make discussion on the </b>
question in front of the class
<b>Expected opinions:</b>
-I think that trying to reduce the feeling
of pressure and a good impression on
your interview is the most useful advice
because you will get a high mark after
the interview and stand a good chance to
get the job.
-Take note the homework
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>B:Speaking</b>
<b>I. Aims: To help students to:</b>
Practise talking about characteristics of some future jobs: teachers, doctors, farmers…
Develop students’ ability through discussing and giving personal opinions on some
kinds of jobs.
Provide students with some knowledge about job interview and raise their awareness
about future job.
<b>II. Aids: textbooks, pictures, board, chalks</b>
<b>III. Procedure</b>
<b>stages </b>
<b>&time</b>
<b>teacher’s activities</b> <b>students’ activities</b>
<b></b>
<b>Pre-speaking</b>
(7 mins)
<b>Warm-up: whisper game</b>
-Divide the class into 5 groups then give
them the instructions of the game
<i>-Each group chooses a representative!</i>
-Give each representative a piece of
paper that describe a job
-Observe students playing the
game and stop it when the game is over.
- Form 5 groups and listen to the instruction
-The representatives receive the paper
-Each representative whispers the sentence
to another member of the group; that
member whispers it to another till the last
member.
sentence that (s) he was whispered and
guess the job.
<b>While </b>
<b>speaking</b>
(38 mins)
<b>Task 1:</b>
-Ask students to read the request and the
information in the columns carefully
-Ask students work in pairs, talking
about some descriptions of the jobs
given in column A.
-Go around and observe students’
speaking activities or help them if
necessary.
-Call on some pairs to stand up and talk
about the descriptions of the jobs.
- Listen and give comments
<b>Task 2:</b>
-Ask students to read the request and the
information in the columns carefully
-Ask students work in pairs, discussing
the jobs that they like or dislike to do
and the reasons why
-Go around and observe students’
speaking activities or help them if
necessary.
-Call on some pairs to stand up and
make discussion.
- Listen and give comments
- Read the request and the information in
the columns carefully
-Form pairs and talk about some
descriptions of the jobs given in column A.
-Ask T if there is any trouble
- Some pairs stand up and talk about the
descriptions of the jobs; others listen and
give comments
<b>Expected answers</b>
A teacher is the one who has to change
teaching and learning methods and/ or
carries out education reform
A doctor is the one who takes care of sick
people and helps save people’s lives
A farmer is the one who constructs
irrigation system and applies new farming
techniques.
A tourist guide is the one who finds good
and safe hotels for customers and take
people to place of interest.
A writer is the one who tell stories
through pictures and create imaginary
characters and events
- Read the request and the information in
the columns carefully
-Form pairs, discussing the jobs that they
like or dislike to do and the reasons why
-Ask T if there is any trouble
- Some pairs stand up and talk about the
descriptions of the jobs; others listen and
<b>Possible discussion:</b>
S1: Do you like to be a journalist?
S2: Yes, I would like to work as a
journalist.
S1: Why?
S2: Because I think that working as a
journalist would be a fascinating job, and
I’d like to have a chance to travel all over
the world and meet many interesting people.
-One S read aloud the request
Task 3:
-Call one S to read aloud the request
-Ask students to work in groups of four,
discussing the jobs they may do after
finishing school
-Go around and observe students’
speaking activities or help them if
necessary.
-Call on some pairs to choose
representatives to report the result..
- Listen and give comments
the jobs they may do after finishing school
-Ask T if there is any trouble
- Some pairs choose representatives to talk
about the descriptions of the jobs; others
listen and give comments
<b>possible description:</b>
<b>-After finishing school, I’d like to work for </b>
a foreign company. I will have a chance to
work with foreigners. I think that I will get
a high salary and the working conditions are
good.
<b></b>
<b>Home-work</b>
<b>( 2 mins)</b>
<b>-Ask students to write a paragraph about</b>
the job they would like to do after
finishing school
-Take note their homework
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>C :Listening</b>
<b>I. Aims: To help students to practise:</b>
Listening to a passage for missing words to fill in the boxes
Listening for gist and do true/false exercises.
Summarizing information in a job a job advertisement.
<b>II. Aids: textbooks, cassettes, record, board, chalks</b>
<b>III. Procedure</b>
<b>stages </b>
<b>&time</b> <b>teacher’s activities</b> <b>students’ activities</b>
<b></b>
<b>Pre-listening</b>
(7 mins)
-Ask the students to look at their
books then work in pairs, discussing
to rearrange the job in order of
degree in Vietnam.
-Call some pairs to report their
results
-Listen and give comments
<b>+Pre-teach</b>
-Introduce the new words that will
appear in the listening task and elicit
the meanings
-Read these words aloud and ask
students to read them in chorus and
<b>individually </b>
- Look at their books then work in pairs,
discussing to rearrange the job in order of
degree in Vietnam.
-Some pairs report their results ; others
listen and give
comments--Listen to T and guess the meanings of
these words
-Practise reading the words in chorus and
individually
<b>While </b>
<b>listening </b>
(30 mins)
<b>task1</b>
-Ask students to carefully read all
the boxes silently in 1 minute
- Read all the boxes carefully
in 1 minute
to do the task
-Ask students to compare their
answers with their friends
-Call some students to give their
answers
-T listen to and correct or comment
<b>Task 2:</b>
-Ask students to spend 2 mins to
read all the statements
-Play the record once again and ask
students to do the task
-Ask students to work in pairs to
exchange their answers
-Ask some students to read aloud
their answers
-Listen and give remarks. T can play
the record again if students cannot
give correct answers
-Listen again and fill in the boxes
-Check their answers with their friends
-Some students give their answers; others
listen and give comments
<b>Expected answers:</b>
1.Jobs
2.service
3.trasportation
4.companies
5.service
-Read all the statements
-Listen to the record again and decide
which statement is true, which one is false.
-Work in pairs and exchange their answers
-Some students read aloud their answers ;
others listen and give comments
<b>Expected answers:</b>
<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b> <b>5</b>
<b>T</b> <b>F</b> <b>T</b> <b>F</b> <b>F</b>
<b></b>
<b>Post-listening</b>
(8 mins)
-Ask students to work in pairs
retelling the content of the listening
passage
-Walks around to help students if
necessary
-Call some pairs to retell the content
of the listening passage
-Listen and give comments
-Students work in pairs retelling the
content of the listening passage
-Ask T if necessary
- Some pairs retell the content of the
listening passage; others listen and
comment
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>D :Writing</b>
<b>I. Aims: To help students to </b>
Understand the main information in job advertisement.
Write a letter applying for the job in the advertisement
<b>II. Aids: textbooks, pictures, board, chalks</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b></b>
<b>Pre-writing</b>
(5 mins)
-Ask students to read the
advertisement in their books carefully.
-Help students if there is any new
works
-Read the advertisement in their books
carefully.
-Ask T if necessary
<b>While </b>
<b>writing</b>
(37
mins)
<b>Task 1:</b>
-Ask one S to read aloud the request of
task 1
-Ask students to work in pairs and do
task 1
-Walk around to observe students’
activities and help them if necessary
-Call some pairs to give their answers
-Give corrections if necessary and
remarks.
<b>Task 2:</b>
- Ask one S to read aloud the request
of task 2
-Ask all students to write a letter
applying for the job mentioned in the
advertisement in task 1
-T may call 1 or 2 students to write
his/her passage directly on the board
-Walk around help students if
necessary .Ask them to pay attention
to such linking words as first, second,
-Ask all students to look at the board
and correct their friend’s writings
-Give T’s own comments and
corrections
- One S read aloud the request of task 1
- Work in pairs and do task 1
-Ask T if necessary
- Some pairs to give their answers; others
give corrections
<b>Possible answers:</b>
-Type of job: tour guide
-Level of education needed
-Work experience: experience as tour
guide, fluent in English
-Characters and interests: Good manner,
willing to work hard for long hours
-One S read aloud the request of task 2
-Do task 2: write a letter applying for the
job mentioned in the advertisement in
task 1
-1 or 2 students write his/her passage
directly on the board
-Ask if necessary.
-Pay attention to such linking words as
first, second, etc.
- Look at the board and correct their
friend’s writings
-Give corrections or comments to the
writings on the board
<b>Home- </b>
<b>work</b>
(3 mins) -Ask students to correct their writing athome. -Take note homework
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>E :Language focus</b>
<b>I. Aims:</b>
Pronunciation: students practice pronouncing weak form and strong form words: and,
but, at, for, of, to, from
Grammar: students study the relative clauses
<b>III. Procedure</b>
<b>STAGES </b>
<b>&TIME</b>
<b>TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES</b> <b>STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES</b>
<b>Pronunciation</b>
(10 mins) 1.Listen and repeat-Read the words in the textbook or
play the record once or twice.
-Read and ask students to repeat in
chorus then individually or in pairs
-Call some students to read the
words aloud
-Listen and correct if necessary
2.Practice reading the sentences
-Read the sentences once or twice
then ask students to practise reading
in pairs
-Call some students to read the
sentences aloud.
-Listen, correct if necessary and ask
students to practice more at home
-Listen to the pronunciation of the
-Listen and then repeat in chorus
then individually
-Some students read the words aloud;
others listen and correct if there are
mispronunciation
-Listen to the teacher and practise
reading the sentences in pairs
-Some students read the sentences
aloud; others listen and correct if
necessary
<b>Grammar </b>
(35 mins) Exercise 1: -Ask students to read the request of
task 1 carefully and do the task
-Walk around to help students if
necessary
-Ask students to compare their
answers with their friends’
-Call some students to read out the
answers
-Give correction or comments if
necessary
Exercise 2:
-Ask students to read the request of
task 1 carefully and do the task
-Walk around to help students if
necessary
-Ask students to compare their
answers with their friends’
-Call some students to read out the
answers
-Give correction or comments if
necessary
-Read read the request of task 1
carefully and do the task
-Ask T if there is any trouble
-Compare compare their answers
with their friends’
-Some students read out the
answers; other give corrections
<b>Suggested answers:</b>
1.whom 6.who
2. which 7.whose
-Ask T if there is any trouble
-Compare compare their answers
with their friends’
-Some students read out the
answers; other give corrections
<b>Suggested answers:</b>
Exercise 3:
-Ask students to read the request of
task 1 carefully and do the task
-Walk around to help students if
necessary
+Ask students to compare their
answers with their friends’
-Call some students to read out the
answers
-Give correction or comments if
necessary
mine.
2.A man carrying a lot of money in a
box got on the bus.
3. In the street there were several
people waiting for the shop to open
4. Britain imports many cars
which/that were made in Japan
5. There are a lot of people in your
office waiting to talk to you.
6. The cowboy wounded by an arrow
fell off his horse
7. Most of the people injured in the
crash recovered quickly
8. John, wishing he hadn’t come to
the party, looked anxiously at his
watch.
-Read read the request of task 1
carefully and do the task
-Ask T if there is any trouble
-Compare compare their answers
with their friends’
-Some students read out the
2. The people who have just moved
in next door have the same surname
as the people just moved out.
3. Noticing the door was open; I
decided to go in, which turned out to
be a mistake.
4. Pauline asked me a question to
which I had no reply
5. Shouting at the top of his voice, he
rushed out of the room, which was a
typical.
6.By the end of the week, which was
the deadline, everyone who wanted
travel scholarships had applied (for
them)
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>Unit 7: Economic reforms</b>
<b>A. Language skills</b>
- To help students gain some knowledge about economic reforms in Vietnam.
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
- Students can ask and answer about a picture
- Students can ask and answer about the measures that the government and people of
Fantasia have done in carrying out economic reforms.
- Students learn more words and phrases in term of economy.
<b>3. . Listening:</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can understand the passage and then
they can summarize the passage that they have listened to.
- Students learn more words and phrases in term of music
<b>4. Writing:</b>
- Students can write a report basing on the information given in the Table of Tango’
economic development in two decades.
<b>B. Language focus</b>
<b>1. Pronunciation:</b>
- Students can pronounce correctly the sounds /s/ and /z/ and words pronounced with /s/
and /z/.
<b>2. Grammar:</b>
- Students know how to use “to infinitive” to talk about purposes.
- Students revise information questions.
- Students practice using past tense to talk about people’ autobiography
<b>A. Reading</b>
<b>Aims</b>
- To help students gain some knowledge about economic reforms in Vietnam.
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
- Students learn words and phrases in terms of economics and policies.
<b>Aids</b>
<b>ProceduresStages Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- reading</b>
(4min)
<b>While- reading</b>
<b>( 30 min.)</b>
<b>Task 1</b>
<b>( 8 min.)</b>
- Greet Ss
- Ask students to look at
the picture page 70 and ask
Ss to answer some questions:
<i>1. What can you see in </i>
<i>the picture?</i>
<i>2. Do you think that the </i>
<i>people in this picture lead a </i>
<i>rich or poor life?</i>
<i>3. What, in your opinion,</i>
<i>should be done to improve </i>
<i>the situation?</i>
- Call a pair to report
their discussion
- Introduce the topic:
<i><b> “Economic reforms in </b></i>
<i><b>Vietnam”</b></i>
- Teach some new words:
ask students whether they
know the words, if they do
not know them, explain in
English then ask them to
give Vietnamese equivalents
to check their understanding
<i>- initiate(v): start sth</i>
<i>- shift(v): move or be </i>
<i>moved from one position or </i>
<i>place to another</i>
<i>- sector(n): a part of the </i>
<i>business activity of a country</i>
<i>- priority(n): the state of </i>
<i>being more important than </i>
<i>sb/sth or of coming before </i>
<i>sb/sth else</i>
<i>- intervention(n): the act </i>
<i>of intervening, especially a </i>
<i>deliberate entry into a </i>
<i>situation or dispute in order </i>
<i>to influence events or </i>
<i>prevent undesirable </i>
<i>consequences </i>
<i>- subsequent(n): coming </i>
<i>after or later</i>
<i>- inefficient(adj): not </i>
<i>working or producing results</i>
<i>in the best way, so that time </i>
<i>or money is wasted</i>
<i>encourage(v): give hope,</i>
<i>support or confidence to sb</i>
- Let the whole class read
-Greet teacher
- Listen to the teacher and think about
the topic.
- Answer teacher’s questions in pairs
- Give Vietnamese equivalents
- <i>initiate(v): bắt đầu </i>
- <i>shift(v): chuyển</i>
- <i>sector(n): ngành, lĩnh vực</i>
- <i>priority(n): quyền ưu tiên </i>
- <i>intervention(n): sự can thiệp</i>
- <i>subsequent(n): tiếp theo</i>
- <i>inefficient(adj): khơng hiệu quả</i>
<i>encourage(v): khuyến khìch,</i>
- Read the words
- Read the passage in silence
- Do task 1
<i>National </i>
<i>Congress:</i>
<i>Renovation:</i> <i>đổi mới</i>
<i></i>
<i>Under-developed:</i> <i>ph¸t triĨn thÊpCha ph¸t triĨn / </i>
<i>Dominate:</i> <i>Chi phối </i>
<i>Stagnant:</i>
<i>Inflation:</i> <i>Lạm phát </i>
<i>Government </i>
<i>subsidies:</i>
<i>Sự bao cấp của </i>
<i>chính phủ</i>
<i>Government </i>
<i>commitment:</i>
<i>Sự cam kết của </i>
<i>chính phủ </i>
<b>Task 2</b>
<b>( 10 min.)</b>
<b>Task 3</b>
<b>( 7 min.)</b>
the new words twice or three
times.
- Call 2-3 students to
read new words again.
- Ask students to read the
passage in silence
- Ask students to do
Task 1: Give Vietnamese
equivalent words to ones
given in the passage
-Ask students to discuss
the answers in pairs.
- Check Ss’ answer
- Write down the answers
- Let the whole class read
the new words twice or three
times.
- Call 2-3 students to
read new words again.
- Ask students to do task
2 in pairs
- Go around to supervise
students if necessary.
- Ask representatives of
pairs to give the answers. If
students’ answers are right,
repeat them, if not, give the
right answers.
- Ask students to do task
3 in groups
- Go around to supervise
students if necessary
- Ask representatives of
groups to answer the
questions. If students’
- Write down the answers and read
the words
- Do task 2 in pairs
- Give the answers:
1. F
2. F
3. T
4. F
5. T
- Do task 3
* Answers:
<i>1. It was officially initiated in 1986 by</i>
<i>our Vietnam Communist Party.</i>
<i>2. Its aim was to restructure the </i>
<i>economy of Vietnam and to raise the </i>
<i>living standards of the people.</i>
<i>3. The measures the Government </i>
<i>introduced to implement Doi Moi were </i>
<i>(as follows):</i>
- <i>eliminated government subsidies,</i>
- <i>shifted economic priority from </i>
<i>heavy industry to three major economic </i>
<i>programs: production of food, production</i>
<i>of consumer goods and production of </i>
<i>exports,</i>
- <i>reduced state intervention in </i>
<i>business,</i>
- <i>opened trade relations with all </i>
<i>countries in the world,</i>
- <i>encouraged foreign and domestic </i>
<i>private investment.</i>
<i>4. Since Doi Moi, Vietnam has </i>
<i>undergone substantial changes. They are:</i>
- <i>productivity and agricultural </i>
<i>exports have constantly increased,</i>
- <i>the farmers have enjoyed land use </i>
<i>rights and have had greater choice on </i>
<i>How to use their agriculture land,</i>
- <i>the workers have worked harder,</i>
- <i>the children, particularly those </i>
<i>from ethnic minorities have had more </i>
<i>opportunities to enjoy education and </i>
<i>training.</i>
<b>Post- reading</b>
<b>( 11 min.)</b>
- Ask students to do
After you read in pairs,
scanning the text to find
information to complete the
note.
- Go around to supervise
them. Note down the serious
and common mistakes
- Call some pairs to read
their note
+Give feedback and
correct some serious or
common mistakes.
<i>to Doi Moi, we will attract more foreign </i>
<i>capital investment and build a better life </i>
<i>for our people.</i>
- Do the Task in pairs
* Suggested answers:
<i>Before Doi Moi:</i>
<i>Economy: under-developed, </i>
<i>dominated by traditional agriculture</i>
<i>Country and people: poor</i>
<i>Production: stagnant</i>
<i>Shortage of schools, hospitals</i>
<i>Inflation</i>
<i> Government’s renovation measures:</i>
<i>Eliminated government subsidies,</i>
<i>Opened trade relations with all </i>
<i>countries in the world,</i>
<i>Shifted economic priority from heavy </i>
<i>industry to three major economic </i>
<i>programs: production of food, production</i>
<i>of consumer goods and production of </i>
<i>exports,</i>
<i>Reduced state intervention in </i>
<i>business,</i>
<i>Encouraged foreign and domestic </i>
<i>private investment.</i>
<i>Since Doi Moi:</i>
<i>Productivity and agriculture exports: </i>
<i>increased</i>
<i>Farmers: enjoyed land rights, had </i>
<i>greater choice to use their land </i>
<i>Workers: worked harder</i>
<i>Children: enjoyed education and </i>
<i>training.</i>
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>B. Speaking</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can ask and answer about some World Cup
- Students learn more words and phrases in term of music.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b>III . Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 5 min.)
- Introduce the lesson:
<i>Today, we learn Unit 7: Economic </i>
<i>Reforms, part B. Speaking(Write on the </i>
board the title)
- Listen to the teacher and write the title
in their notebooks.
<b>Task 1</b> - Ask students to look at Task 1<sub>- Ask students to do Task 1</sub>
- While students discuss, walk around the
class to guide or supervise them and give
them help if necessary.
- Ask one pair to report what they have
talked
- Give comments, correct the common
mistakes after they finish.
- Look at Task 1
- Do Task 1
- Work in pairs and discuss in about 2
minutes.
<i>S1: What does each pair of pictures tell</i>
<i>you?</i>
<i>S2: Picture 1a, 1b are about a school, </i>
<i>picture 2a, 2b are about a company</i>
<i>S1: What changes can you see in each </i>
<i>pair of pictures?</i>
<i>S2: The school in 1b is larger than it is </i>
<i>in 1a; it consists of three two-floor </i>
<i>buildings. The factory in 2b is larger </i>
<i>and better equipped than it is in 2a.</i>
<i>S1: What do you think people have </i>
<i>done to change them?</i>
<i>S1: I think people have invest more </i>
<i>money in the school and the factory.</i>
<b>While- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 28 min.)
- Introduce some new words (eliciting,
give the definitions in English then ask
students to translate them into Vietnamese
to check their understanding)
<i>disadvantaged(adj): in a bad social or </i>
<i>economic situation; poor</i>
<i>method(n): a way of doing sth</i>
<i>qualified(adj) having passed an exam or</i>
<i>having the knowledge, experience, etc. </i>
<i>in order to be able to do sth</i>
<i>insurance(n): an arrangement with a </i>
<i>company in which you pay them regular</i>
<i>amounts of money and they agree to pay</i>
<i>the costs if, for example, you die or are </i>
<i>ill, or if you lose or damage sth</i>
- Listen to the teacher.
- Guess the meaning of the new words.
<i>disadvantaged: </i>
<i>insurance: bảo hiểm </i>
<i>irrigation(n): bringing a supply of </i>
<i>water to a dry area, especially in order </i>
<i>to help crops to grow </i>
<i>drainage(n): a system used for making </i>
<i>water, etc. flow away from a place</i>
<i>fertilizer(n): a natural or chemical </i>
<i>substance that is put on land or soil to </i>
<i>make plants grow better</i>
<i>pesticide(n): a chemical substance that </i>
<i>is used for killing animals, especially </i>
<i>insects, that eat food crops</i>
<i>- insecticide(n): a substance that is </i>
<i>used for killing insects</i>
<i>- drainage: </i>
<i>- fertilizer: phan bón</i>
<i>- insecticide: thuốc diệt côn trùng</i>
- Let the whole class read the new words
twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words
again.
- Ask students to do Task 2 in groups
- Read the new words .
- Do Task 2 in groups
<i>The country of Fantasia started its overall</i>
<i>reform in the early 1970s. The reform has </i>
<i>brought about positive effects in many </i>
<i>sectors of the economy, particularly in </i>
<i>education, health care and agriculture. </i>
<i>Work in groups, suggesting What the </i>
<i>government and the people of Fantasia </i>
<i>have done to improve their economy in </i>
<i>these sectors.</i>
<i>+ Which tense do we use When talking </i>
<i>about recent changes?</i>
- Call one student to repeat the instruction
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes.
<i>Present perfect tense</i>
- One student repeats the teacher’s
instruction.
- The others listen to their friends to
make clear about what they have to do.
- Do Task 2
<b>Post- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 10 min.)
<b>Task 3</b>
- After about 3 minutes of discussion, call
some groups to report what they have
done.
- Ask the others to listen to their friends
<i>- Listen to students attentively and pay </i>
<i>attention to the mistakes they have made</i>
- After students finish, give them
- Read aloud the words and ask the whole
class to repeat.
- Call 1 pair to role play in front of the
whole class.
- Ask the others listen attentively to their
friends’ dialogue and give comments or
ask questions.
- Some groups report what they have
discussed.
<i>S1: What have the government and the </i>
<i>people of Fantasia done to improve </i>
<i>education?</i>
<i>S2: They have built more schools and </i>
<i>have equipped more equipment and </i>
<i>facilities.</i>
<i>S3: They also give more scholarships to</i>
<i>poor of disadvantage students.</i>
- Repeat after the teacher.
- One pair to role play in front of the
<b>Home </b>
<b>work</b>
( 2 min.)
- Call another group if there is enough
time.
- Give feedback and correct serious or
common mistakes.
<i>- Prepare a presentation about the </i>
<i>development of Vietnam after Doi Moi</i>
questions.
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes.
- Listen to the teacher and note down
homework
<b> Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>C. Listening </b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can catch detail information from the
passage.
- Students can summarize the passage.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Tapes and cassette
- Handouts
<b> III. Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’ activities</b> <b>Learners’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>listening</b>
(6min.)
<b>Warm up:</b>
- Let students play crosswords to revise
the vocabulary in Reading lesson.
<i>- Call some pairs to give the answers.</i>
<i>- Ask students to do task 1: discuss the </i>
<i>question: Do you think that drug- taking</i>
<i>should be banned? Why and Why not?</i>
<i>- Ask one pair to report what they have </i>
<i>discussed.</i>
- Introduce some new words (eliciting,
give the definitions in English then ask
students to translate them into
Vietnamese to check their
understanding)
- <i>rationally(adv): contrary to or </i>
<i>lacking in reason or logic </i>
- <i>unfortunately(adv): not lucky</i>
- <i>discourage(v): stop sb doing sth, </i>
<i>especially by making him/her realize </i>
<i>that it would not be successful or a good</i>
<i>idea</i>
- <i>ruin(v): damage sth so badly that it </i>
<i>loses all its value, pleasure, etc.</i>
- <i>measure(n): an action that is done </i>
- Listen to the teacher.
- Play the game.
- Do task 1 in pairs
<i>S1: Do you think that drug-taking </i>
<i>should be banned?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, I think so.</i>
<i>S1: Why so?</i>
<i>S2: Because taking drug is harmful to </i>
<i>people’s health.</i>
- Listen to the teacher.
- Guess the meaning of the new words.
- <i>rationally(adv): </i>
- <i>unfortunately(adv): </i>
- <i>discourage(v): </i>
- <i>ruin(v): </i>
<i>for a special reason</i>
- <i>drug- taker(n): a person who use </i>
<i>drugs</i>
- <i>solution(n): a way of solving a </i>
<i>problem, dealing with a difficult </i>
<i>situation, etc.</i>
<i>islander(n): a person who lives on a </i>
<i>small island</i>
- Let the whole class read the new
words twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words
again.
<i>- islander(n): </i>
- Read the new words
<b></b>
<b>While-listening</b>
(29min.)
<i><b>Task 1</b></i>
- Ask students to listen to the passage
the first time
- Read the passage twice
- Ask some students to give their
answers. If their answers are right,
repeat them; if not give the correct
- Listen to the passage and answer the
questions.
* Answers:
<i>1.</i> <i>F(in the Atlantic Ocean)</i>
<i>2.</i> <i>F(a plant which contained a </i>
<i>powerful drug)</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>T</i>
<i>4.</i> <i>T</i>
<i>5.</i> <i>F(on TV)</i>
<i>6.</i> <i>F(nobody took any notice)</i>
<i>7.</i> <i>T</i>
<i>8.</i> <i>T</i>
<i>9. F(other countries)</i>
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
- Ask them to listen again the second
and the third time to finish task 2:
- Ask students to discuss the answers to
the questions in pairs.
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary.
- Eliciting the answers from students, if
their answers are right, repeat the
answers, if they are wrong, give them
the answers:
- If most students do not catch the
information for the questions, let them
listen again to the passage once more.
<i>1. What did the people of Tango </i>
<i>discover?</i>
<i>2. What did they do with the plant?</i>
<i>3. What negative effects did the drug </i>
<i>bring about?</i>
- Listen again the third time to finish
the task.
- Discuss the answers to the questions
in pairs.
- Answer the questions, and correct the
wrong answers.
<i>1. They discovered a plant which </i>
<i>contained a powerful drug.</i>
<i>2. They grew it all over the island.</i>
<i>3. The negative effects the drug brought</i>
<i>about were:</i>
<i>4. How many measures did the </i>
<i>Government take and what were they?</i>
<i>5. What did the Government of Tango </i>
<i>decide to do eventually?</i>
<i>- The whole population began to run </i>
<i>short of food.</i>
<i>4. The government took three measure: </i>
<i>introduced a law to make the drug </i>
<i>illegal, put the drug- takers into prison,</i>
<i>and exported the drug to other </i>
<i>countries.</i>
<i>5. Eventually they decided to export the</i>
<i>drug to other countries.</i>
<b>Post- </b>
<b>listening</b>
(10min.)
- Ask students to do After you read in
<i>groups _ discuss the question: Do you </i>
<i>think that the government of Tango’s </i>
<i>decision to export the drug to other </i>
<i>countries was a better solution? Why/ </i>
<i>Why not?</i>
- Go around to supervise them. Note
down serious and common mistakes.
- Ask one group to report what they
have discussed
- Give comments after they finish
- Call another group if there is enough
time.
- Give feedback and correct serious or
common mistakes.
- Do After you read in groups
- Suggested expression:
<i>In my opinion…</i>
<i>I think…</i>
<i>I believe…</i>
<i>I do not think…</i>
<i>From where I stand…</i>
- Report what they have discussed
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes.
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes.
<b>Handout</b>
1 2 3
1 D O M I N A T E
2 I N F L A T I O N I
<i><b>S</b></i>
3 S T A G N A N T
4 C O N S U M E R A
5 R E N O V A T I O N T
L E
6 R E S O L V E
7 E D U C T I O N
Fill in the box with the words which means…
<b>Down:</b>
1. to become or to make sth become liquid
2. a soft silver-white metal that is often mixed with other metals
3. a large area of land in the countryside that is owned by one person or family
<b>Across:</b>
1. to be more powerful, important or noticeable than others
2. a general rise in prices; the rate at which prices rise
3. not flowing and therefore dirty and having an unpleasant smell
4. a person who buys things or uses services
5. bring something such as a building back to a former better state by means of repairs,
redecoration, or remodeling
7. the teaching or training of people, especially in schools
<b>Answers:</b>
1 2 3
1 D O M I N A T E
2 I N F L A T I O N I S
3 S T A G N A N T
4 C O N S U M E R A
5 R E N O V A T I O N T
L E
6 R E S O L V E
7 E D U C T I O N
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>D.Writing</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can write a report basing on the information given in the Table of Tango’
economic development in two decades
- Students can improve their writing skill.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>writing</b>
(7min.)
- Write on the board the title of the
- Ask students to look at the table page
76
<i>This table presents the achievements the </i>
<i>government and the people of Tango </i>
<i>have gained in some braches of the </i>
<i>economy after two decades of their </i>
<i>economic reform.</i>
- Introduce some new words.( eliciting,
give the definitions in English then ask
students to translate them into
Vietnamese to check their understanding)
<i>Fishery: the catching, </i>
<i>processing, or selling of fish, including </i>
<i>the industries and occupations involved </i>
<i>in these activities </i>
<i>Forestry: the science or skill of </i>
<i>planting and growing trees or managing </i>
<i>forests </i>
- Let the whole class read the new words
twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words
again.
- Write down in the notebooks the title.
- Look at the table page 76
- Listen to the teacher.
- Guess the meaning of the new words.
<i>- Fishery :ng nghiÖp</i>
<i> </i>
<i>- Forestry: lâm nghiệp </i>
- Read the words
While-
writing
(28
min.)
<i><b>Task 1</b></i>
- Ask students to answer the questions in
pairs.
- Go around to supervise them if
- Call some pairs to give the answers. If
their answers are right, repeat them; if
not give the correct answers.
- Answer the questions in pairs
* Give the answers:
<i>S1: What was the economic situation </i>
<i>in Tango before 1980?</i>
<i>S2: Before 1980, Tango was in ruins, </i>
<i>starvation was popular because of the </i>
<i>lack of rice and foods.</i>
<i>S1: What can you say about the </i>
<i>economic situation in Tango from </i>
<i>1980 to 2000?</i>
<i>S2: From 1982 to 2000, Tango’s </i>
<i>economy has developed quickly.</i>
<i>S1:What do you think the government </i>
<i>and the people of Tango have done to </i>
<i>achieve these result?</i>
<i>S2: I think they have borrowed money </i>
<i>from other countries to boost the </i>
<i>economy.</i>
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
- Ask students to do Task 2 individually:
<i>write a report of 150 words on the </i>
<i>economic development of Tango. It must </i>
<i>conclude details such as:</i>
<i>the economic situation of Tango </i>
<i>before 1980</i>
<i>the measures taken by the </i>
<i>government and the people of </i>
<i>Tango to overcome the problems.</i>
<i>the achievements (as presented in</i>
<i>the table) they have made as a </i>
<i>result of the reform.</i>
<i>What words do you often use to express </i>
<i>changes in economy?</i>
- Go around to supervise them. Note
down serious and common mistakes
- Show and correct some common
<i>stagnant</i>
<i>underdeveloped</i>
<i>increase</i>
<i>decrease</i>
<i>steadily</i>
<i>by…percent</i>
<i>gradually…</i>
- Write the description
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes.
<b>Post- </b>
<b>writing</b>
( 10
min.)
- Ask students to revise their description.
- Ask students to hand in their work to
mark
- Revise their description.
- Hand in their work
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Class:. . .
<b>E.Language focus</b>
<b> I. Aims</b>
<b> 1. Pronunciation:</b>
- Students can pronounce correctly the sounds /s/ and /z/ and words pronounced with /s/
and /z/.
<b>2. Grammar:</b>
- Students know how to use “to infinitive” to talk about purposes.
- Students revise information questions.
- Students practice using past tense to talk about people’ autobiography
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b>II. Procedures</b>
III.
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pronunciation</b>
(5in.) - Introduce the lesson:<i>Auxiliary often has the strong </i>
<i>form when it is used in short </i>
<i>answers, and it has the weak </i>
<i>form when it is used in questions.</i>
- Read the auxiliaries both strong
and weak forms for students to
recognize the difference
- Listen to the teacher
- Listen to the teacher
- Read the second time for the
students to repeat.
- Ask 2-3 students to repeat,
correct their mispronounce.
<b>Practice these sentences</b>
- Read 2 times the sentences, and
then let the whole class read the
sentences twice or three times.
- Put stress mark for them to
practise
<i>I’ve got something for you.</i>
<i>You’ve got something for me?</i>
<i>We’ve failed and they’ve passed.</i>
<i>I haven’t always lived in this </i>
<i>cottage, you know.</i>
<i>Haven’t you? You’ve not been </i>
<i>here long, of course.</i>
<i>I haven’t. But I’ve grown to love </i>
<i>it already.</i>
<i>He’s left, and she’s gone to work,</i>
<i>too.</i>
<i>Hasn’t the doctor come yet?</i>
<i>No. The doctor hasn’t been </i>
<i>called.</i>
- Call 2-3 students to read the
sentences again.
- Ask them to read the sentences
in pairs, go around to supervise
them.
- Read the sentences twice or three
times.
<i>I’ve got something for you.</i>
<i>You’ve got something for me?</i>
<i>We’ve failed and they’ve passed.</i>
<i>I haven’t always lived in this cottage, </i>
<i>you know.</i>
<i>Haven’t you? You’ve not been here </i>
<i>long, of course.</i>
<i>I haven’t. But I’ve grown to love it </i>
<i>already.</i>
<i>He’s left, and she’s gone to work, too.</i>
<i>Hasn’t the doctor come yet?</i>
<i>No. The doctor hasn’t been called.</i>
- Read the sentences again
- Read the sentences in pairs.
<b>Grammar</b>
(35in.) <i><b>Exercise 1</b></i>- Introduce some prepositional
phrases
<i>Can you tell me what the </i>
<i>difference between in the end and</i>
<i>at the end is? Give me some </i>
<i>example.</i>
<i> -About in time and on time?</i>
<i>Among and between?</i>
<i> in the end: refers to time and means </i>
‘finally’
<i>We were too tired to cook, so in the </i>
<i>end we decided to eat out. At the end of</i>
<i>sth refers to the last part of a book, </i>
<i>film, class, etc., at the point where it is </i>
<i>about to finish:</i>
<i>At the end of the meal, we had a row </i>
<i>about who should pay for it.</i>
<i>End is sometimes used before another </i>
<i>noun:</i>
<i>the end house • the end seat</i>
<i>in time: (for sth/to do sth) not late; </i>
<i>with enough time to be able to do sth</i>
<i>on time :not too late or too early; </i>
<i>punctual</i>
- Ask students to do exercise 1
- Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to discuss the
answers in pairs.
- Call some students to give their
answers. If students’ answers are
right, repeat them, if not, give the
<i><b>Exercise 2:</b></i>
- Ask students to do Exercise 2_
<i>complete the sentences, use “ </i>
<i>although” + a sentence from the </i>
<i>box.</i>
- Read the example to illustrate.
- Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to discuss the
answers in pairs.
- Call some students to give their
answers. If students’ answers are
right, repeat them, if not, give the
right answers
<i><b>Exercise 3</b></i>
- Ask students to do Exercise 3
individually
- Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to discuss the
answers in pairs.
- Go around to supervise them if
<i>when the meaning is that of number 7 </i>
<i>(above) Among is always used of more </i>
<i>than two people or things considered </i>
<i>as a group rather than as individuals</i>
<i>- Do Exercise 1</i>
- Discuss the answers in pairs.
- Give the answers
<i>1. in (in time for = early enough)</i>
<i>(“on time” doesn’t go with “for” or </i>
<i>“to”)</i>
<i>2. of</i>
<i>3. on (in business = being a </i>
<i>businessman, on business = to go on </i>
<i>business).</i>
<i>4. At</i>
<i>5. To</i>
- Do Exercise 2
- Discuss the answers in pairs
- Give the answers
<i>1.</i> <i>Although I was very tired, I </i>
<i>couldn’t sleep.</i>
<i>2.</i> <i>Although I had never seen her </i>
<i>before, I recognized her from the </i>
<i>distance.</i>
<i>3.</i> <i>She wasn’t wearing a coat, </i>
<i>although it was pretty cold.</i>
<i>4.</i> <i>We thought we’d better invite </i>
<i>them to the party, although we don’t </i>
<i>like them very much.</i>
<i>5.</i> <i>Although I didn’t speak the </i>
<i>language, I managed to make myself </i>
<i>understood.</i>
<i>6.</i> <i>Although the heat was on, the </i>
<i>room wasn’t very warm.</i>
<i>7.</i> <i>I didn’t recognized her </i>
<i>although I’d met her twice before.</i>
<i>8.</i> <i>We’re not very good friends </i>
<i>although we have known each other for</i>
<i>a long time.</i>
- Do Exercise 3
- Discuss the answers in pairs.
- Call some students to give their
answers. If students’ answers are
right, repeat them, if not, give the
right answers
<i>1. Although we had packed our </i>
<i>bags the night before, we forgot many </i>
<i>things.</i>
<i>2. They didn’t eat anything </i>
<i>although they were very happy.</i>
<i>3. Although Luong hadn’t studied </i>
<i>English before, he could speak/ read </i>
<i>the language very well/ make himself </i>
<i>understood.</i>
<i>4. Although he had revised </i>
<i>everything /studied very hard, he failed</i>
<i>the exam.</i>
<i>Although summer has come, it is pretty</i>
<i>cold/ there hasn’t been any rain.</i>
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>Unit 8: Life in the future</b>
<b>A. Language skills</b>
<b>1. Reading:</b>
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
<b>2. Speaking:</b>
- Students can ask and answer about changes of people and the world in the future.
<b>3. . Listening:</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can understand the passage about life
expectancy.
<b>4. Writing:</b>
- Students can write about the ideal world in which they would like to live in the year
2020.
<b>B. Language focus</b>
<b>1. Pronunciation:</b>
- <i>Students can pronounce correctly the contracted forms of auxiliaries(have and has)</i>
<b>2. Grammar:</b>
- Students know how to use articles and.
- Students know how to use some preposition phrases.
<b>A. Reading</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b>III. Procedures</b>
Pre-
reading
(4 min.)
- Ask students to look at the picture,
page 80 and ask:
<i>What are the people going to do?</i>
<i>Does it look like a normal </i>
<i>airplane?</i>
<i>How is it different?</i>
<i>Do you think that life in the future </i>
<i>will be like this?</i>
- Introduce the lesson
- Ask students to look at the
questions in Before you read, page
<i>80, working in pairs to discuss the </i>
<i>question in Before you read:</i>
<i>1. Do you think life will be </i>
<i>better in the future? Why/ </i>
<i>Why not?</i>
<i>2. List three things that might </i>
<i>happen in the future.</i>
- Call a pair to report their
discussion
- Look at the picture and answer the
questions:
<i>They are going to fly.</i>
<i>No</i>
<i>It looks more modern than a normal </i>
<i>airplane. It has no wings.</i>
<i>Yes,</i>
<i>No</i>
<i><b>Possible answers</b></i>
<i>S1: Do you think life will be better in the </i>
<i>future? </i>
S2: Yes
S1: Why?
S2: Because of the development of science
and technology.
<i>S1: List three things that might happen in </i>
<i>the future</i>
<i>S2: I think in the future, people can live in </i>
<i>the Mar, people will be healthy without any</i>
<i>diseases, and they can travel by plane to </i>
<i>work everyday.</i>
<b>While- </b>
<b>reading</b>
(30 min.)
<b>Task 1</b>
- Teach some new words: ask
students whether they know the
words, if they do not know them,
explain in English then ask them to
give Vietnamese equivalents to
check their understanding
<i>- Corporation(n): a large business</i>
<i>company</i>
<i>- Chore(n): a job that is not </i>
<i>interesting but that you must do</i>
<i>- Burden(n): something that is </i>
<i>heavy and difficult to carry</i>
<i>- Influence(v): to have an effect on</i>
<i>or power over sb/sth so that </i>
<i>he/she/it changes</i>
<i>- Methane(n): a gas without color </i>
<i>or smell, that burns easily and </i>
<i>that we can use to produce heat</i>
<i>- Responsibility(n): a duty to deal </i>
<i>with sth so that it is your fault if </i>
<i>sth goes wrong</i>
- Let the whole class read the new
words twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new
words again.
- Ask students to read the passage
in silence
- Ask students to do Task 1:
- Give Vietnamese equivalents
<i>- Corporation(n): doanh nghiep</i>
<i>- Chore(n): chuyen vat vanh</i>
<i>- Burden(n): ganh nang</i>
<i>- Influence(v): anh huong, tac dong</i>
<i>- Methane(n): chat metan</i>
<i> </i>
<i> - Responsibility(n): trach nhiem</i>
- Read the words
<b>Task 2</b>
<b>Task 3</b>
<i>Find the words in the passage that </i>
<i>can match with the definition on the</i>
<i>right column.</i>
-Ask students to discuss the
answers in pairs.
- Ask individuals to do the Task
- Write down the answers on the
board.
<i>1. Pessimists</i>
<i>2. Optimists</i>
<i>3. Economic depression</i>
<i>4. Terrorism</i>
<i>5. Wiped out</i>
<i>6. Space shuttle</i>
- Check students’ understanding of
the words by asking them to give
the Vietnamese equivalents
- Let the whole class read the new
words twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new
words again
- Ask students to do task 2 in
groups:
<i>Answer the questions according to </i>
<i>the passage.</i>
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary.
- Ask representatives of groups to
answer the questions. If students’
answers are right, repeat them, if
not, give the right answers.
<i>1. What will happen in an </i>
<i>economic depression?</i>
<i>2. Why, according to pessimist, </i>
<i>will security of the earth be </i>
<i>threatened?</i>
<i>3. What will life be in the future, </i>
<i>according to optimists?</i>
<i>4. What are the most important </i>
<i>factors that will bring about </i>
<i>dramatic changes in different </i>
<i>aspects of out lives?</i>
- If students’ answers are right,
repeat them, if not, give the right
answers.
- Ask students to do After you
read in pairs:
<i>Scan the text to find information to </i>
<i>complete the note.</i>
- Go around to supervise them.
Note down the serious and common
- Discuss the answers in pairs.
- Give the answers.
- Write down the answers
<i>1. Pessimists: nhung nguoi bi quan</i>
<i>2. Optimists: nhung nguoi lac quan</i>
<i>3. Economic depression: suy thoai kinh </i>
<i>te</i>
<i>4. Terrorism: khung bo</i>
<i>5. Wiped out: xoa sach</i>
<i>6. Space shuttle: tau vu tru</i>
- Read the words
- Do task 2 in groups
- Answer the questions
<i>1. Many large corporations will be wiped </i>
<i>out and millions of jobs will be lost.</i>
<i>2. The security of the earth will be </i>
<i>threatened by terrorism, as terrorist </i>
<i>groups will become more powerful and </i>
<i>more dangerous.</i>
<i>3. People will be living in much cleaner </i>
<i>environment, breathing fresher air and </i>
<i>eating healthier foods. They will also be</i>
<i>better looked after by a modern medical</i>
<i>system. Domestic chores will no longer </i>
<i>be a burden thanks to the interventions </i>
<i>of labor- saving devices.</i>
<i>4. They are developments in micro </i>
<i>technology- computer and </i>
telecommunication
<i>1. Work: factories will be run by robots, </i>
<i>offices will go electronic, many people </i>
<i>will work from home.</i>
mistakes
- Call some pairs to read their note.
- If students’ answers are right,
repeat them, if not, give the right
answers
<b>Post- </b>
<b>reading</b>
(10min.)
<b>Home </b>
<b>work</b>
( 1 min)
- Ask students to do After you read
in groups
<i>What are the advantages of robots?</i>
<i>What are the disadvantages of </i>
<i>robots?</i>
(write the answers on the board)
- Go around to supervise them.
- Ask one group to report what they
have discussed
- Give feedback and correct some
serious or common mistakes.
- Read the passage again
- Emphasize words and structures in
the passage
- Do After you read in groups
<i>Advantages: save labor, do difficult jobs so </i>
<i>that men have more time to enjoy life or do </i>
<i>more creative work.</i>
<i>Disadvantages: replace human beings in </i>
<i>many fields so many people will lose their </i>
<i>jobs or go jobless</i>
- Report what they have discussed
- Listen to the feedback and correct their
mistakes
- Listen to the teacher and note down
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<i><b>B. Speaking</b></i>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can ask and answer about changes of people and the world in the future.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b> III. Procedures</b>
Stages <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b><sub>Students’ activities</sub></b>
<b>Warm </b>
<b>up</b>
( 2 min.)
<b>While- </b>
- Tell students a riddle
+ Ask students the question:
<i>How can we get some clean water?</i>
<i> + Give the answer: Bring the water from </i>
<i>the river and wash it. </i>
- Introduce the lesson:
- Introduce some new words (eliciting,
- Listen to the riddle
- Answer the question
+ We buy clean water from the shop
+ We ask our parents for it.
+ ………..
- Listen to the teacher and write the
title in their notebooks.
<b>speaking</b>
(28 min.)
<i><b>Task 1</b></i>
(13 min.)
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
(16 min.)
give the definitions in English then ask
students to translate them into
Vietnamese to check their understanding)
<i>- to be declared open: to be stated </i>
<i>publicly and officially </i>
<i>- holiday resort: a place where a lot of </i>
<i>people go to on holiday</i>
<i>- a cure for: a medicine or treatment </i>
<i>that can cure an illness, etc.</i>
<i>- holiday maker: a person who go on </i>
<i>holiday.</i>
<i>- running on: the action or sport of </i>
<i>running</i>
<i>- cold war: the war against common </i>
<i>cold.</i>
- Let the whole class read the new words
twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words
- Ask students to look at Task 1
- Ask students to do Task 1:
<i>Look at these newspaper cuttings from </i>
<i>the future, They were written on 1st<sub> of </sub></i>
<i>April. Say what will have happened and </i>
<i>what people will be doing by the end of </i>
<i>the 21st<sub> century</sub></i>
- Revise the use of future tense:
<i>+ When we want to say about an event </i>
<i>going on at a particular time or over a </i>
<i>period of time in the future, which tense </i>
<i>do we use?</i>
<i>+ When we want to talk about something </i>
<i>that will be ended, completed or achieved</i>
<i>by a particular point in the future, which </i>
<i>tense do we use?</i>
<i>Look at the example, this action will be </i>
<i>completed by the end of the 21st<sub> century, </sub></i>
<i>so we use will+ have+ P.II.</i>
- Ask one student to read the example
<i>have happened and what people will be </i>
<i>doing by the end of the 21st<sub> century.</sub></i>
- Walk around the class to guide or
supervise them and give them help if
necessary.
- Ask some pairs to report what they have
talked
- Give comments; correct the common
mistakes after they finish.
- Introduce some new words (eliciting,
give the definitions in English then ask
- Guess the meaning of the new
words.
- <i>to be declared open: c </i>
<i>công bố rộng rÃi</i>
- <i>holiday resort: nơi nghỉ mát</i>
- <i>a cure for: phơng thức chữa</i>
- <i>holiday maker: khách đi </i>
<i>nghỉ</i>
- <i>running on: </i>
- <i>cold war: cuoc chien chong </i>
<i>lai benh cam</i>
- Read the new words
- Look at Task 1
- Do Task 1
<i>We use “will+be+V_ing.”</i>
<i>- Read the example</i>
- Do Task 1 in pairs
- Work in pairs
students to translate them into
Vietnamese to check their understanding)
- <i>Living standard: the quality of life</i>
- <i>Fatal disease: disease causing or </i>
<i>ending in death.</i>
- Let the whole class read the new words
twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words
again
<i>How can we say if we want to make </i>
<i>prediction?</i>
<i>What else? </i>
<i>-> We often base on something to make </i>
<i>prediction, you have to give reasons for </i>
<i>your prediction.</i>
<i>Could you tell me how we say to give </i>
<i>reason for something?</i>
<i>If we mean that the reasons are negative, </i>
<i>what should we use</i>
<i>If the reasons are positive, what should </i>
<i>we use?</i>
<i>Give some expressions of reasons: </i>
<i>-…because living standards will be/ have </i>
<i>been improved.</i>
<i>- …the cures for fatal diseases will be/ </i>
<i>have been found.</i>
<i>-… it’s (Jupiter/Mars/moon) too far.</i>
<i>-… It’s (Jupiter/Mars/moon) too cold/ hot</i>
<i>-… there’s no water there./ The </i>
<i>atmosphere is too thin there.</i>
<i>-…It’s too costly/ just impossible to do </i>
<i>that.</i>
- Ask one student to read the example
- Ask some Ss to recall the way to show
opinion
- Give example:
<i><b>In my opinion, it’s unlikely that by the </b></i>
<i>end of the 21st<sub> century people will be </sub></i>
<i>living to the age of 150 because there will</i>
<i>be more and more diseases.</i>
- Ask students to do Task 2 in pairs,
<i>discussing which of the predictions are </i>
<i>likely/ unlikely to happen. Give at least </i>
<i>two reasons for each</i>
- Call one student to repeat the instruction
to check whether they are clear about
what they have to do
- Go around to supervise them. Note
down serious and common mistakes
- After about 3 minutes of discussion, call
- Listen to the teacher.
- Guess the meaning of the new
words.
- Read the new words
<i>It is likely that+ clause</i>
<i>It is unlikely that+ clause</i>
<i>It is possible that+ clause</i>
<i>It is impossible that+ clause</i>
<i>Because+ clause</i>
<i>Because of+ Noun phrase</i>
<i>Since/As + clause</i>
<i>For+ Noun phrase</i>
<i>As a result of</i>
<i>Thanks to+ Noun phrase</i>
<i>In my opinion</i>
<i>from my point of view</i>
<i>As far as I am concerned.</i>
<i>I believe</i>
- Listen to the teacher
- Do Task 2 in pairs
- One student repeats the teacher’s
instruction.
<b>Post- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 15 min.)
<i><b>Task 3:</b></i>
some pairs to report what they have done
- After students finish, give them
comments: correct some pronunciation
mistakes they have made
- Read aloud the words and ask the whole
class to repeat
<i>- Ask students to do Task 3:: making </i>
<i>some more predictions about what life </i>
<i>will be like one hundred years from now.(</i>
<i>work in groups of 4) </i>
- After about 3 minutes of discussion, call
some groups to report what they have
done
- After students finish, give them
comments: correct some pronunciation
mistakes they have made
- Read aloud the words and ask the whole
class to repeat
- Some pairs report
- Repeat after the teacher
- Work in groups to do Task 3
- Some groups report what they have
discussed:
<i>I think it is likely by the end of 2106, </i>
<i>scientists will have found a cure for </i>
<i>AIDS thanks to the developments of </i>
<i>science and technology</i>
- Listen to the teacher
- Repeat after the teacher
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>C Listening</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can understand the passage about life
expectancy.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Tapes and cassette
- Handouts
<b>III. Procedures</b>
Stages <b>Teacher’ activities</b> <b>Learners’ activities</b>
<b>Warm </b>
<b>up</b>
( 7 min.)
- Let students play a game
- Introduce the game rule:
This is Lucky number game. We have
four teams. I will give a definition, and you
have to give the word it refers to. You have
to raise your hand to answer the question.
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>listening</b>
<b></b>
<b>While-listening</b>
<b>( 28 </b>
<b>min.)</b>
<b>Task 1</b>
<b>( 16 </b>
<b>min.)</b>
Who raises the hand first will have the
right to answer the question.
If your answer is right, you will get one
point. If not, the other team will answer the
question. The team which gets the true
answer can choose the next question, if it is
a lucky number, that team will get 2 points.
- Let Ss play
- Ask students to do Task 1:
Discuss the question: Which of the
+ No smoking? Why?
+ Love a lot? Why?
- Ask one pair to report what they have
discussed.
- Introduce some new words (eliciting,
give the definitions in English then ask
students to translate them into Vietnamese
to check their understanding)
- incredible(adj. ): impossible or very
difficult to believe
- centenarian(adj. ):belong to the
century, 100 years
- eradicate(v): to destroy or get rid of
sth completely
- life expectancy(n): the number of
years that a person is likely to live
- eternal life(n): life without
beginning or end; existing or continuing for
ever
- mushroom(v):rise quickly
- curable(adj.): (used about a disease)
that can be made better
- Let the whole class read the new
words twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words
again.
- Ask students to read the statements in
Task 1.
- Ask students to listen to the passage
the first time:
Listen to an interview about people’s
- Do Task 1 in pairs
S1: Which factors do you think
might help people to have a long
and healthy life/
S2: I think they are no smoking,
eating healthy food, laughing a lot,
and doing exercise because by
doing so, we can improve our
- Listen to the teacher.
- Guess the meaning of the new
words.
- Read the new words
- Read the statements in Task 1.
- Listen to the passage and
answer the questions
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
<i><b>( 12 </b></i>
<i><b>min.)</b></i>
<b>Post- </b>
<b>listening</b>
<b>( 10 </b>
<b>min.)</b>
life expectancy in the future, listen and
decide whether the statements are true or
false.
- Play the tape or read the passage
twice
- Ask some students to give their
- Ask them to listen again the second
and the third time to finish Task 2: answer
the questions
- Ask students to discuss the answers to
the questions in pairs.
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary.
- Call some students to give the
answers. If their answers are right, repeat
the answers, if they are wrong, give them
the answers:
- If most students do not catch the
information for the questions, let them
listen again to the passage once more.
1. What are factors that help people
have longer life expectancy according to
Dr. Davis?
2. Which factor is the most important
one? Why?
3. What will we have been able to do
about AIDS in ten years’ time?
- Ask students to do After you listen
in groups
Work in groups and the advantages and
disadvantages of having a very long life.
- Eliciting some ideas from the students:
What are the advantages of having a
very long life?
What are the disadvantages of having a
very long life. (write the answers on the
board)
1. F(Because we look after
ourselves, eat more healthily, cut
down on things like butter, alcohol
and cigarettes)
2. F(80)
3. T
4. T
- Listen again the third time to
finish the Task.
- Discuss the answers to the
- Answer the questions, and
correct the wrong answers.
1. Eating more healthily,
cutting down on things like butter,
alcohol and cigarettes.
2. The development in medical
science.
3. In ten years’ time AIDS will
also be brought under control. /
We’ll have been able to bring AIDS
under control.
- Do After you listen in groups
Advantages:
- Do many things they want to
do/ enjoy life more
- See their children and
grandchildren grow up
- Help their children and
grandchildren
- Children and grandchildren
are happy with them
Disadvantages:
- Too weak to do things and
often ill
- Feel lonely when children
have grown up and busy with their
own lives, and friends are dead.
- Go around to supervise them. Note
down serious and common mistakes.
- Ask one group to report what they
have discussed
- Give comments after they finish
- Call another group if there is enough
time
- Give feedback and correct serious or
common mistakes
- Listen to the teacher and
correct the mistakes
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
<b>Games</b>
Lucky number
1. Pessimists: a person who always thinks that bad things will happen or that sth will be
not be successful
<b>2. Lucky number</b>
3. Economic depression: a period when the economic situation is bad, with little business
activity and many people without a job
4. Terrorism: the killing of ordinary people for political purposes
<b>5. Lucky number</b>
6. Wipe st out: to destroy sth completely
7. Corporation(n): a large business company
<b>8. Lucky number</b>
9. Chore(n): a job that is not interesting but that you must do
10. Burden(n): something that is heavy and difficult to carry
11. Influence(v): to have an effect on or power over sb/sth so that he/she/it changes
<b>12. Lucky number</b>
13. Methane(n): a gas without colour or smell, that burns easily and that we can use to
14. Responsibility(n): a duty to deal with sth so that it is your fault if sth goes wrong
<b> Here </b>
<b>Week: . . . </b> <b>Preparing date: . . . </b>
Period: . . . Teaching date: . . .
Class:. . .
- Students can write about the ideal world in which they would like to live in the year
2020.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
III. Procedures
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>writing</b>
( 10
min.)
<i><b>Task 1:</b></i>
<b>While- </b>
<b>writing</b>
( 20
min.)
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
- Write on the board the title of the lesson: Unit
8: Life in the future.
Part D. Writing
- Introduce some new words and expressions
Under the threat of terrorism: trong sự đe
doạ của chủ nghÜa khđng bè
Live in harmony: sèng hoµ thn
Live in clean healthy environment: sống
trong môi trờng trong sạch, lành mạnh.
My main desire is : mong ớc, khát vọng
chính của tôi là..
Materialistic (a): theo chủ nghĩa vật chÊt,
nỈng vỊ vËt chÊt
- Let the whole class read the new words twice
or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again.
- Ask students to read the passage to analyze
it.
- Ask students to discuss the answers to the
questions in pairs.
- Go around to supervise students if necessary.
- Call some students to give the answers. If their
answers are right, repeat the answers, if they are
wrong, give them the answers:
1.What are the student’s concerns about?
World peace?
Employment?
The environment?
The people ?
2. Are your concerns similar to those?
3. Do you have other concerns? What are they?
- Ask students to do Task 2 individually.
¦rite about the ideal world in which you would
like to live in the year 2020 using the ideas you
have discussed in Task 1
Try to use the expression like: my main desire is
to…., I would also wish…
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
- Write down in the notebooks the title.
- Listen to the teacher
- Read the words
- Read the passage to analyze it.
- Discuss the answers to the questions
in pairs.
- Answer the questions, and correct the
wrong answers.
- World peace: peaceful world, no war,
no conflicts, no threat of terrorism,
people love in harmony
- Employment: everyone has a job.
- Environment: clean and healthy, less
noise, less pollution, larger parks,
wildlife is protected.
- People: less materialistic, less selfish,
less violent, and more loving.
Yes, they are.
Yes, I wish people can do the job that
<b>Post- </b>
<b>writing</b>
( 15
min.)
- Show and correct some common mistakes
- Ask students to exchange their work to check
- Ask students to revise their description
- Ask students to hand in their work to mark
- Write the description
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes
- Exchange the writing
- Revise their description.
<b>E. Language focus</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
1. Pronunciation
- <i>Students can pronounce correctly the contracted forms of auxiliaries(have and has)</i>
2. Grammar
- Students know how to use articles and.
- Students know how to use some preposition phrases.
<b> II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b> III. Procedures</b>
Stages <b>Teacher’s activities</b> Students’ activities
<b>Pronun </b>
<b>ciation</b>
( 7 min.)
<b>Listen and</b>
<b>repeat</b>
<b>Practice</b>
<b>Grammar </b>
<b>and </b>
<b>vocabular</b>
<b>y</b>
(38 min.)
<i><b>Exercise 1</b></i>
(20 min.)
- Pronounce the auxiliaries both
- Ask 2-3 students to repeat, correct their
mispronounce
- Read 2 times the sentences, and then let
the whole class read the sentences twice
or three times.
- Put stress mark for them to practice
- Call 2-3 students to read the sentences
again.
- Ask them to read the sentences in pairs,
go around to supervise them.
- Ask students to look at examples in
exercise
<i> - Ask students to do exercise 1: combine</i>
<i>the sentences with although / even </i>
<i>though</i>
- Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to discuss the answers in
- Listen to the teacher
- Read after the teacher
- Read the sentences twice or three times
- Read the sentences again.
- Read the sentences in pairs.
<i>- Do Exercise 1</i>
<i><b>Exercise 2</b></i>
(18 min.)
- Call some students to give their
answers. If students’ answers are right,
repeat them, if not, give the right answers
<i>- Revise the use of articles.</i>
- Ask students to do Exercise 2
<i>Put a/an, the or No article ( #) in each </i>
<i>space.</i>
- Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to discuss the answers in
pairs.
- Call some students to give their
answers. If students’ answers are right,
repeat them, if not, give the right answers
- Give the answers
<i>1. in (in time for = early enough)(“on </i>
<i>time” doesn’t go with “for” or </i>
<i>“to”)</i>
<i>2. of</i>
<i>3. on (in business = being a </i>
<i>businessman, on business = to go on</i>
<i>business).</i>
<i>4. At</i>
<i>5. to</i>
<i>6. in</i>
<i>7. about</i>
<i>8. for</i>
<i>9. between, opposite</i>
<i>10. to</i>
11.
<i><b>A/an is used before an indefinite single </b></i>
<i>noun, “the” is used before a definite noun, </i>
<i>“the” is also used before an musical </i>
<i>instruments. We use zero article before a </i>
<i>proper noun or some structures such as </i>
<i>by+ (means of transport) and last+ (time)</i>
<i>…</i>
- Do Exercise 2
- Discuss the answers in pairs
- Give the answers
<b>Unit 9: Deserts</b>
<b>A. Language skills</b>
<b>Reading:</b>
- To help students gain some knowledge about deserts.
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
Students learn words and phrases in terms of deserts
<b>Speaking:</b>
- Students can ask and answer about a picture
- Sts know the deserts in Autralia.
<b> Listening:</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can understand the passage and then
they can summarize the passage that they have listened to.
- Students learn more words and phrases in term of deserds
<b>Writing:</b>
- Students can write a report basing on the information given in the Table of the Sahara
desert
<b>B. Language focus</b>
<b>1. Pronunciation:</b>
- Students can use full and contracted forms of auxiliaries.
<b>2. Grammar:</b>
- <i>Students know how to use so, but, howrever, and therefore</i>
<b>A. Reading</b>
<b>Aims</b>
- To help students gain some knowledge about deserts.
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
- Students learn words and phrases in terms of deserts
<b>Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>reading</b>
(4min)
<b>While- </b>
<b>reading</b>
<b>( 30 </b>
<b>min.)</b>
<b>Task 1</b>
<b>( 8 </b>
<b>min.)</b>
<b>Task 2</b>
<b>( 10 </b>
<b>min.)</b>
<b>Task 3</b>
<b>( 7 </b>
<b>min.)</b>
<b>Post- </b>
<b>reading</b>
- Greet Ss
- Ask students to look at the picture page 91 and
ask Ss to answer some questions:
<i>1 What do you know about deserts?</i>
<i>2 what kinds of plants and animals live in a desert.</i>
<i>3 Name some of the countries which have eserts</i>
- Call a pair to report their discussion
- Introduce the topic:
<i><b> Deserts</b></i>
- Teach some new words: ask students whether
they know the words, if they do not know them,
explain in English then ask them to give
Vietnamese equivalents to check their
understanding
- <i>strech</i>
- <i>sandy</i>
- <i>aerial survey</i>
- <i>Royal Giographical Society of Autralia</i>
- <i>dune</i>
- <i>sloping</i>
- <i>hummock</i>
- <i>crest</i>
- <i>spinifex</i>
-- Let the whole class read the new words twice or
three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again.
- Ask students to read the passage in silence
- Ask students to do Task 1: Give Vietnamese
equivalent words to ones given in the passage
-Ask students to discuss the answers in pairs
Check Ss’ answer
- Write down the answers on the board
- Let the whole class read the new words twice or
three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again.
- Ask students to do task 2 in pairs
- Go around to supervise students if necessary.
- Ask students to do task 3 in groups
- Go around to supervise students if necessary
- Ask representatives of groups to answer the
questions. If students’ answers are right, repeat
them, if not, give the right answers
- Greet teacher
- Listen to the teacher and think about
the topic.
- Answer teacher’s questions in pairs
- Give Vietnamese equivalents
- Read the words
- Read the passage in silence
- Do task 1
- Write down the answers and read the
words
- Do task 2 in pairs
2. F
3. T
4. F
5. F
<i>6 T</i>
- Ask students to do After you read in pairs,
scanning the text to find information to complete
the note.
- Go around to supervise them. Note down the
serious and common mistakes
- Call some pairs to read their note
- Give feedback and correct some serious or
common mistakes.
* Suggested answers:
- Listen to the feedback and correct
their mistakes.
<b>B. Speaking</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can ask and answer about some deserts
- Students learn more words and phrases about deserts.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b>III . Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 5 min.)
- Introduce the lesson:
<i>Today, we learn Unit 9: part B. Speakin </i>
<i>g(Write on the board the title)</i>
- Listen to the teacher and write the title in
their notebooks.
<b>Task 1</b> - Ask students to look at Task 1- Ask students to do Task 1
- While students discuss, walk around the class
to guide or supervise them and give them help
if necessary.
- Ask sts to check the trees and animals which
can live in deserts
- Give comments, correct the common mistakes
after they finish.
words explanation
<i>eucalyptus</i>
<i>date palm</i>
- Look at Task 1
- Do Task 1
- Work in pairs and discuss in about 2
minutes.
<b>While- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 28
min.)
<b>Task 2</b>
Ask sts to find out as many natural features of
adesert as possible .Then compare your note
with the other pairs using the given cues
eg: It is very hot in summer and it is cold in
winter
Work in pairs
- Let the whole class read the new words twice
- Read the new words .
- Do Task 2 in groups
- Call one student to repeat the instruction to
check whether they are clear about what they
have to do
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes.
<i>Present perfect tense</i>
- One student repeats the teacher’s
instruction.
- The others listen to their friends to make
clear about what they have to do.
<b>Post- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 10
min.)
<b>Task 3</b>
<b>Home </b>
<b>work</b>
( 2 min.)
- After about 3 minutes of discussion, call some
groups to report what they have done.
- Ask the others to listen to their friends
<i>- Listen to students attentively and pay </i>
<i>attention to the mistakes they have made</i>
- After students finish, give them comments:
correct some pronunciation mistakes they have
made
- Read aloud the words and ask the whole class
to repeat.
- Call 1 pair to role play in front of the whole
class.
- Ask the others listen attentively to their
friends’ dialogue and give comments or ask
questions.
- Call another group if there is enough time.
- Give feedback and correct serious or common
mistakes.
<i>- Prepare a presentation about the information </i>
<i>about other deserts</i>
- Some groups report what they have
<i>S1: I choose: food, water, camel, knife, </i>
<i>blanket, </i>
<i>S2: Ichoose: wter, car food, camel, </i>
<i>blanket.</i>
- Repeat after the teacher.
- One pair to role play in front of the whole
class.
- Listen attentively to their friends’
dialogue and give comments or ask
questions.
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes.
- Listen to the teacher and note down
homework
<b>C.Listening </b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can catch detail information from the
passage.
- Students can summarize the passage.
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Tapes and cassette
- Handouts
<b> III. Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’ activities</b> <b>Learners’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>listenin</b>
<b>g </b>
(6min.)
<b>Warm up:</b>
ask sts to answer the questions
1 What is a desert ?
2 How is a desert formed ?
3 can human beings make a desert ?
Work in pairs
<b></b>
<b>While-listenin</b>
<b>g</b>
(29min.)
<i><b>Task 1</b></i>
- Ask students to listen to the passage the first
time
- Read the passage twice
- Ask some students to give their answers. If
their answers are right, repeat them; if not
give the correct answers.
- Listen to the passage and answer the
questions.
* Answers:
<i>9.</i> <i>T</i>
<i>10.</i> <i>T</i>
<i>11.</i> <i>F</i>
<i>12.</i> <i>F</i>
<i>13.</i> <i>T</i>
<i> </i>
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
- Ask them to listen again the second and the
- Ask students to discuss the answers to the
questions in pairs.
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary.
- Eliciting the answers from students, if their
answers are right, repeat the answers, if they
are wrong, give them the answers:
- If most students do not catch the
information for the questions, let them listen
again to the passage once more.
<i><b>Task 3 Ask sts to listen again and fill in the </b></i>
missing words
- Answer the questions, and correct the wrong
answers.
1. 90 percent
2. smaller plants
3. prevent
4. speading
5. capital
6. canals
<b>Post- </b>
<b>listenin</b>
(10min.)
- Ask students to do After you read in groups
<i>_ discuss the questions in the book</i>
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes.
- Ask one group to report what they have
discussed
- Give comments after they finish
- Call another group if there is enough time.
- Give feedback and correct serious or
common mistakes.
wor in groups
<b>D.Writing</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can write a report basing on the information given in the Table of Tango’
economic development in two decades
- Students can improve their writing skill.
<b>II. Aids</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>writing</b>
(7min.)
- Write on the board the title of the lesson:
Unit 9
Part D. Writing
- Ask students to look at the table page 96
<i>This table presents the information about the </i>
<i>Sahara resert</i>
- Introduce some new words.( eliciting, give
the definitions in English then ask students to
translate them into Vietnamese to check their
understanding)
arid
moisture
elevation
acacia
Gazelle
jackal
- Write down in the notebooks the title.
- Look at the table page 96
- Listen to the teacher.
- Guess the meaning of the new words.
- Read the words
While-
writing
(28 min.)
- Go around to supervise them if necessary.
- Call some pairs to give the answers. If their
answers are right, repeat them; if not give the
correct answers.
<i>.</i>
<i>Questions </i>
<i>1 Where is th Sahara desert ?</i>
<i>2 Whwt is its total area /</i>
<i>3 How long is it ? </i>
<i>4 How wide is it? </i>
<i>5 What is its natural feature ?</i>
<i>- Land</i>
<i>- Climate</i>
<i>Wal kinds of trees can live in the Sahara </i>
<i>desert ?</i>
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes
- Show and correct some common mistakes.
- Write the description
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes.
<b>Post- </b>
<b>writing</b>
( 10
min.)
- Ask students to revise their description.
- Ask students to hand in their work to mark
<b>E.Language focus</b>
<b> I. Aims</b>
<b> 1. Pronunciation:</b>
- Students can use the full and contracted forms of theauxiliaries pronunced
- Students know how to use “ so, but, however and therefore.
- Students revise information questions.
- Students practice using past tense to talk about people’ autobiography
<b>-II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b>III. Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pronunci</b>
<b>ation</b>
(7min.)
- Introduce the lesson:
<i>Auxiliary often has the strong form when </i>
<i>it is used in short answers, and it has the </i>
<i>weak form when it is used in questions.</i>
- Read the auxiliaries both full and
contracted forms for students to recognize
- Read the second time for the students to
repeat.
- Ask 2-3 students to repeat, correct their
mispronounce.
- Listen to the teacher
- Listen to the teacher
- Read the sound
<b>Practice these sentences</b>
- Read 2 times the sentences, and then let
the whole class read the sentences twice
or three times.
- Read the sentences twice or three times.
- Read the sentences again
- Read the sentences in pairs.
<b>Gramma</b>
<b>r</b>
(38min.)
<i><b>Exercise 1</b></i>
<i><b>Explain how to use so or but</b></i>
<i><b>Can you tell me what the difference so </b></i>
<i><b>and but ? Give me some example</b></i>
<i>It began to rain, so I open my umbrella</i>
<i>It began to rain, but he didn"t open his </i>
<i>umbrella</i>
<i> Note: Before " so, but " there is a comma</i>
- Call some students to give their answers.
If students’ answers are right, repeat them,
if not, give the right answers
<i>.</i>
<i><b>Exercise 2</b></i>
Underline the correct altrmative in the
sences
<i><b>Note: xplain how to use however</b></i>
- Call some students to give their answers.
If students’ answers are right, repeat them,
if not, give the right answers
Go around to supervise them
- Give the answers
<i>1 so</i>
<i>2 but</i>
<i>3 so</i>
<i>4 but</i>
<i>5 so</i>
<i>6 but</i>
<i>7 but</i>
<i>8 so</i>
<i>- give the answer </i>
<i>1 but</i>
<i><b>Exercise 3</b></i>
Add so, therefore, or however
<i><b>Note The use of therefore</b></i>
- Call some students to give their answers.
If students’ answers are right, repeat them,
if not, give the right answers
Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to do exercise 3
- Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to discuss the answers in
pairs.
- Call some students to give their answers.
If students’ answers are right, repeat them,
if not, give the right answers
<i>Answer </i>
<i>1 therefore</i>
<i>2 so</i>
<i>3 so</i>
<i>4 therefore</i>
<i>5 however</i>
<i>6 therfore</i>
<i>7 so</i>
<i>8 howerver</i>
<i>.</i>
<b>Unit 10 :</b> <b>Endangered species</b>
<b>A. Language skills</b>
<b>5. Reading:</b>
- To help students gain some knowledge about endangered species
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
Students learn words and phrases in terms of plants and animals.
<b>6. Speaking:</b>
- Students can ask and answer about a picture .
- Students learn more words and phrases in term of plants and animals
<b>7. . Listening:</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can understand the passage and then
they can summarize the passage that they have listened to.
- Students learn more words and phrases in term of plants and animals
<b>8. Writing:</b>
- Students can write a report basing on the information given in the Table of the Sahara
desert
<b>2. Grammar:</b>
- <i>Students know how to use Modal verbs: may, might, must mustn't, needn't</i>
<b>A. Reading</b>
<b>Aims</b>
- To help students gain some knowledge about endangered species To help students
improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the meaning of words in
context.
- Students learn words and phrases in terms of endangered species
<b>Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>reading</b>
(4min)
<b>While- </b>
<b>reading</b>
<b>( 30 min.)</b>
<b>Task 1</b>
<b>( 8 min.)</b>
<b>Task 2</b>
<b>( 10 min.)</b>
<b>Task 3</b>
<b>( 7 min.)</b>
- Greet Ss
- Ask students to look at the picture page 99
and ask Ss to answer some questions:
<i>1 Which of the folloing animals and insects </i>
<i>are found in Vietnam ?</i>
<i>2 Which of them is / are in danger ?/</i>
- Call a pair to report their discussion
- Introduce the topic:
<i><b>Endangered species </b></i>
- Teach some new words: ask students
whether they know the words, if they do not
know them, explain in English then ask them
to give Vietnamese equivalents to check their
understanding
<i>- rhinoceros</i>
<i>- leopard</i>
<i>- parrot</i>
<i>- impact</i>
<i>- enact</i>
<i>-vulnarable</i>
<i>- poriority</i>
<i>- derive from</i>
<i>- habitat</i>
- Let the whole class read the new words
twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again.
- Ask students to read the passage in silence
- Ask students to do Task 1: Give
Vietnamese equivalent words to ones given
in the passage
-Ask students to discuss the answers in pairs.
- Check Ss’ answer
- Write down the answers on the board
- Let the whole class read the new words
twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again.
-Greet teacher
- Listen to the teacher and think about
the topic.
- Answer teacher’s questions in pairs
- Give Vietnamese equivalents
- Read the words
- Read the passage in silence
- Do task 1
Answer :
1- 1 d
2 2 e
3 3 a
4 4 b
5 5 c
- Write down the answers and read
the words
- Do task 2 in pairs
- Give the answers:
1. d
<b>Post- </b>
<b>reading</b>
<b>( 11 min.)</b>
- Ask students to do task 2 in pairs
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary.
- Ask representatives of pairs to give the
answers. If students’ answers are right, repeat
them, if not, give the right answers.
- Ask students to do task 3 in groups
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary
- Ask representatives of groups to answer the
questions. If students’ answers are right,
repeat them, if not, give the right answers
- Ask students to do After you read in pairs,
scanning the text to find information to
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
the serious and common mistakes
- Call some pairs to read their note
- Give feedback and correct some serious or
common mistakes.
5. d
- Do the Task in pairs
* Suggested answers:
- Listen to the feedback and correct
their mistakes.
<b>B. Speaking</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can ask and answer about endangered animals
- Talking about the information of some endangered animals.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b>III . Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- speaking</b>
( 5 min.) - Introduce the lesson: <i>Today, we learn Unit 10: part B. Speakin </i>
<i>g(Write on the board the title)</i>
- Listen to the teacher and write the
title in their notebooks.
<b>Task 1</b> - Ask students to look at Task 1<sub>- Ask students to do Task 1; Ask and answer </sub>
the questions
1 How do you call ;Gau truc, Te Giac,
Ho, Voi, in English
2 Where does each of them live ?
3 Which of animals can use as pets or for
food or medicine ?
4 Which of them is/ are in dangered ?
5 Can you guees the population of each
species ?
- Look at Task 1
- Do Task 1
- Give comments, correct the common
mistakes after they finish.
<b>While- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 28 min.)
<b>Task 2</b>
Ask sts to study the information in the box
Word explanation
<i>decline</i>
<i>swamp</i>
<i>bark</i>
Work in pairs
- Let the whole class read the new words
twice or three times.
-Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer
questions about them
- Read the new words .
- Do Task 2 in groups
S1 Where do giant pandas live ?
S2 In bamboo forests
S1 What is the population of pandas
in the world?
S 2 Only about 600
- Call one student to repeat the instruction to
check whether they are clear about what they
have to do
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes.
<b>Post- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 10 min.)
<b>Task 3</b>
<b>Homework</b>
( 2 min.)
- After about 3 minutes of discussion, call
some groups to report what they have done.
- Ask the others to listen to their friends
<i>- Listen to students attentively and pay </i>
<i>attention to the mistakes they have made</i>
- After students finish, give them comments:
correct some pronunciation mistakes they
have made
- Read aloud the words and ask the whole
class to repeat.
- Call 1 pair to role play in front of the whole
class.
- Ask the others listen attentively to their
friends’ dialogue and give comments or ask
questions.
- Call another group if there is enough time.
- Give feedback and correct serious or
common mistakes.
<i>- Prepare a presentation about the </i>
<i>information about animals</i>
Work in groups: Take turn to give an
oral report on the animals mentioned
<i>in task 2.</i>
- Repeat after the teacher.
- One pair to role play in front of the
whole class.
- Listen attentively to their friends’
dialogue and give comments or ask
questions.
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes.
- Listen to the teacher and note down
homework
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can catch detail information from the
passage.
- Students can summarize the passage.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Tapes and cassette
- Handouts
<b> III. Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’ activities</b> <b>Learners’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>listening </b>
(6min.)
<b>Warm up:</b>
Ask sts to dicuss and choose the best
answer
Aek sts to listen to the teacher and repeat
some new words in the book
Work in pairs
1 A
2 B
3 D
4 B
5 C
<b></b>
<b>While-listening</b>
(29min.)
<i><b>Task 1</b></i>
- Ask students to listen to the passage the
first time
- Read the passage twice
- Ask some students to give their answers.
If their answers are right, repeat them; if
not give the correct answers.
- Listen to the passage and answer the
questions.
* Answers:
2 B
3 D
4 B
<i>5 C </i>
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
- Ask them to listen again the second and
the third time to finish task 2:
Ask sts to complete the chart in the book.
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary.
- Eliciting the answers from students, if
their answers are right, repeat the answers,
if they are wrong, give them the answers:
- If most students do not catch the
information for the questions, let them
listen again to the passage once more.
- Listen again the third time to finish the task.
1peaceful
2 plant-eating
3 a few females and their young
4 plants and afew insects
5 in trees
6 in grasses
7 forests being cut down
<b>Post- </b>
<b>listening</b>
(10min.)
- Ask students to work in pairs to
summarise the main ideas of the passage
using the information intask 1 and 2
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes.
- Ask one group to report what they have
discussed
- Give comments after they finish
- Call another group if there is enough
time.
- Give feedback and correct serious or
common mistakes.
<b>D.Writing</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can write a report basing on the information given to write about measures to
protect endangered species and possible results
- Students can improve their writing skill.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b>III. Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>writing</b>
(7min.)
ask sts to speak something about some rare
animals which are in dangered .
-Ask some questions ;
Why are they in dangered ?
-what about their habitats ?
- Are they in danger ofvanishing?
- Why are they in dangered of in nanishing?
Listen and answer the quetions
While-
writing
Task1
Ask sts to read task 1 carefully and then suggest
possible measures that should be taken to solve
the broblems
- In troduce the Red-List
-Raise people's wareness of conversation needs.
- Develop wildlife habitat resernes
-Stop people from throwing rubbish in to forests,
cutting down trees, hunting animals for food, fur,
skin or otherproducts
Ask sts to do tak 1
<i>.work in pairs</i>
Discuss the given sollution
Task 2 Ask sts to read the given sollutions again
and then write a paragraph about measures for
protecting endangered animals ( using the ideals
discussed in Task 1 . Begin your paragaph with.
There are anumber of measures tht should be
taken to protect endangered animals
- Write the description
- Go around to supervise them. Note down serious
and common mistakes
- Show and correct some common mistakes.
<b>Post- </b>
<b>writing</b>
( 10 min.)
- Ask students to revise their description.
- Ask students to hand in their work to mark
- Revise their description.
- Hand in their work
<b>E.Language focus</b>
<b> I. Aims</b>
<b> 1. Pronunciation:</b>
- Rhythm
<b>2. Grammar:</b>
- Students know how to modals verbs: may, might, must, mustn't, needn't
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b>III.</b> <b>Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pronunc</b>
<b>iation</b>
(7min.)
- Introduce the lesson:
Ask sts to practise reading the sentences in the
book (paying attention to the stressed syllables )
- Read the second time for the students to
repeat.
- Ask 2-3 students to repeat, correct their
mispronounce.
- Listen to the teacher
- Listen to the teacher
- Read the sentences
<b>Practice these sentences</b>
- Read 2 times the sentences, and then let the
whole class read the sentences twice or three
times.
- Read the sentences twice or three
times.
- Read the sentences again
- Read the sentences in pairs.
<b>Gramm</b>
<b>ar</b>
(38min.)
<i><b>Exercise 1</b></i>
<i><b>Explain how to use may,might, must't needn't</b></i>
- Call some students to give their answers. If
students’ answers are right, repeat them, if not,
give the right answers
<i>.</i>
<i><b>Exercise 2</b></i>
Underline the correct altrmative in the sences
<i><b>Note: xplain how to use however</b></i>
- Call some students to give their answers. If
students’ answers are right, repeat them, if not,
give the right answers
Go around to supervise them
- Give the answers
<i><b>Exercise 3</b></i>
Add so, therefore, or however
<i><b>Note The use of therefore</b></i>
- Call some students to give their answers. If
students’ answers are right, repeat them, if not,
give the right answers
Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to do exercise 3
- Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to discuss the answers in pairs.
- Call some students to give their answers. If
students’ answers are right, repeat them, if not,
give the right answers
<b>Unit 11: Books</b>
<b>A. Language skills</b>
<b>Reading:speci</b>
- To help students gain some knowledge about reading books habits
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
Students learn words and phrases in terms of plants and animals.
<b>Speaking:</b>
- Students can ask and answer about reading habits
- Students learn more words and phrases in term of reading habits
<b> Listening:</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can understand the passage and then
they can summarize the passage that they have listened to.
- Students learn more words and phrases in term of reading books
<b>Writing:</b>
- Students can write a passage describing abook
<b>B. Language focus</b>
<b>1. Pronunciation:</b>
- Rhythm
<b>2. Grammar:</b>
- <i>Students know how to use Modal verbs in pasive voice</i>
<b>A. Reading</b>
<b>Aims</b>
- To help students gain some knowledge about reading habits To help students improve
their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the meaning of words in context.
- Students learn words and phrases in terms of reading habits
<b>Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>reading</b>
(4min)
<b>While- </b>
<b>reading</b>
<b>( 30 min.)</b>
<b>Task 1</b>
<b>( 8 min.)</b>
<b>Task 2</b>
<b>( 10 min.)</b>
<b>Task 3</b>
<b>( 7 min.)</b>
- Greet Ss
- Ask students to look at the picture
page 110 and ask Ss to answer some
<i>1 Do you often read books?</i>
<i>2 what kind of books do you enjoy </i>
<i>reading most ?</i>
<i>3 How do you read books /</i>
- Call a pair to report their discussion
- Introduce the topic:
<i><b>books </b></i>
- Teach some new words: ask
students whether they know the
words, if they do not know them,
explain in English then ask them to
give Vietnamese equivalents to check
their understanding
<i>swalllowed</i>
<i>digest</i>
<i>reviewer</i>
<i>chew</i>
- Let the whole class read the new
words twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words
- Ask students to read the passage in
silence
- Ask students to do Task 1: Give
Vietnamese equivalent words to ones
given in the passage
-Ask students to discuss the answers
in pairs.
- Check Ss’ answer
- Write down the answers on the
board
- Let the whole class read the new
words twice or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words
again.
- Ask students to do task 2 in pairs
-Greet teacher
- Listen to the teacher and think about
the topic.
- Answer teacher’s questions in pairs
- Give Vietnamese equivalents
- Read the words
- Read the passage in silence
- Do task 1
Answer :
1 nuèt chửng
2 chấm vào
3 nếm
4 khó có thể
5 tiêu hoá
6 nhai
7 không thể đặt xuống
- Write down the answers and read
the words
- Do task 2 in pairs
- Give the answers:
1NI
2 F
3 NI
4 T
5F
<b>Post- </b>
<b>reading</b>
<b>( 11 min.)</b>
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary.
- Ask representatives of pairs to give
the answers. If students’ answers are
right, repeat them, if not, give the
right answers.
- Ask students to do task 3 in pairs
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary
- Ask representatives of groups to
answer the questions. If students’
answers are right, repeat them, if not,
give the right answers
Ask sts to work in pairs or groups .
Find the names of types of boks in the
square.
- Go around to supervise students if
necessary
- Ask representatives of groups to
- Ask students to do After you read in
pairs, scanning the text to find
information to complete the note.
- Go around to supervise them. Note
down the serious and common
mistakes
- Call some pairs to read their note
- Give feedback and correct some
serious or common mistakes.
* Suggested answers:
- Listen to the feedback and correct
their mistakes.
Give the answer
a thriller
b romance
c novel
d science
e craft
f fiction
g comic
h biography
<b>B. Speaking</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can ask and answer about endangered animals
- Talking about the information of some endangered animals.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b>III . Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>speaking</b>
( 5 min.)
- Introduce the lesson:
<i>Today, we learn Unit 10: part B. Speakin</i>
<i>g(Write on the board the title)</i>
- Listen to the teacher and write the title in
their notebooks.
<b>speaking</b>
<b>Task 1</b>
- Ask students to do Task 1: complet the
following conversation .
-What sort of books do you like reading ?
- How do you read books?
- When do you often read books?
- Give comments, correct the common
mistakes after they finish.
- Do Task 1
- Work in pairs and practise reading in
about 2 minutes.
( 28 min.)
<b>Task 2</b>
Ask sts to ask and answer about each
other's reading habits, using the questions
in the conversation
Work in pairs
- Work in pairs and practise reading in
about 2 minutes.
-Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and
answer questions about them - Do Task 2 in groups
S1 Where do giant pandas live ?
( 10 min.)
<b>Task 3</b>
<b>Task 4 </b>
<b>Task 5 </b>
<b>Homework</b>
( 2 min.)
- Ask students to do Task 1: complet the
following conversation .
-What are you reading at the moment ?
-Who is the main character?
- What is he like?
Ask sts to ask and answer about the book
you are reading or you have read . Note
down the answer
Ask sts to work in groups .
Report the resultto the group.
<i>Work in pairs.</i>
Work in pairs
Work in groups
<b>C.Listening </b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can catch detail information from the
passage.
- Students can summarize the passage.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Tapes and cassette
- Handouts
<b> III. Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’ activities</b> <b>Learners’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>listenin</b>
<b>g </b>
(6min.)
<b>Warm up:</b>
Aek sts to listen to the teacher and repeat some
listen to the teacher and repeat the words
given in the book
<b>listenin</b>
<b>g</b>
(29min.)
- Ask students to listen to the passage the first
time
- Read the passage twice
- Ask some students to give their answers. If
their answers are right, repeat them; if not give
the correct answers.
questions.
1 B
2 C
3 A
4 A
5 A
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
- Ask them to listen again the second and the
third time to finish task 2:
Ask sts to complete the chart in the book.
- Go around to supervise students if necessary.
- Eliciting the answers from students, if their
answers are right, repeat the answers, if they
are wrong, give them the answers:
- If most students do not catch the information
for the questions, let them listen again to the
passage once more.
- Listen again the third time to finish the
task.
1 family
2 strenghth
3 humans
4 journey
5 pet
<b>Post- </b>
<b>listenin</b>
<b>g</b>
(10min.)
- Ask students to work in pairs to summarise
the main ideas of the passage using the
information intask 1 and 2
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
- Ask one group to report what they have
discussed
- Give comments after they finish
- Call another group if there is enough time.
- Give feedback and correct serious or
common mistakes.
work in groups
<b>Writing</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can write a report basing on the information given to write about books
- Students can improve their writing skill.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b>III.</b> <b>Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
While-
writing Task1
Ask sts to read the questions in the books and put
them under the correct headings
-General introduction
7 4 9
- Summary
2 5 6 8
-Conclution
1 3
Task 2
Ask sts to read task 1 carefully and then ask and
answer above quetons about a book you have
read
Ask sts to do tak 2
work in pairs
Task 2 Ask sts to read the given sollutions again
and then write a paragraph about the book you
have read recently baed on the results of task 1
and task 2
some sugggetions
- I've just read……….
- ………is / are the main charactr(s)
-It is set in………
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes
- Show and correct some common mistakes.
- Write the report
- Listen to the teacher and correct
the mistakes.
<b>Post- </b>
<b>writing</b>
( 10
min.)
- Ask students to revise their description.
- Ask students to hand in their work to mark
- Revise their report
- Hand in their work
<b>E.Language focus</b>
<b> I. Aims</b>
<b> 1. Pronunciation:</b>
- Rhythm
<b>2. Grammar:</b>
- Students know how to modals verbsin passsive voice
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b>III. Procedures</b>
<b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pronun </b>
<b>ciation</b>
- Introduce the lesson:
Ask sts to practise reading the sentences in the
(7min.) book (paying attention to the stressed syllables
)
- Read the second time for the students to
repeat.
- Ask 2-3 students to repeat, correct their
mispronounce.
- Read the sentences
<b>Practice these sentences</b>
- Read 2 times the sentences, and then let the
whole class read the sentences twice or three
times.
- Read the sentences twice or three
times.
- Read the sentences again
- Read the sentences in pairs.
<b>Gramm</b>
<b>ar</b>
(38min.)
<b>Home </b>
<b>work</b>
<i><b>Exercise 1</b></i>
<i><b>Explain how to use modals verbs in passive </b></i>
<i><b>voice</b></i>
- Call some students to give their answers. If
<i>.</i>
<i><b>Exercise 2</b></i>
Ask sts to complete the given conversation
with the suitable passive form of the verb in
brackets
- Call some students to give their answers. If
students’ answers are right, repeat them, if not,
give the right answers
Go around to supervise them
Ask sts to do exercised in the workbook
- Give the answers
1 will be prepared
2 is food going to be cooked…….?
3 will be pre-pacaged
4 can be wared
5 should food be chosen
6 have to offered
7 could be selected
8 ought to be made
<i>.</i>
<b>Unit 12: Water sport</b>
<b>A. Language skills</b>
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
<b>Speaking:</b>
- Students can ask and answer about sports
<b> Listening:</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can understand the passage about water
sports
<b>Writing:</b>
- Students can write about instructions
<b>B. Language focus</b>
<b>1. Pronunciation:</b>
- Elision
<b>2. Grammar:</b>
- Students know how to use Transitive and intransitive verbs
<b>I. Aims</b>
- To help students improve their reading skills: scanning and skimming, guessing the
meaning of words in context.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b>III.</b> <b>Procedures</b>
Stages <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
Pre-
reading
(4 min.)
- Ask students to look at the picture, page 119and
ask:
<i>-Can you name the sport in the picture?</i>
<i>-Where is it played ?</i>
<i>- How do people play it ?</i>
- Introduce the lesson
- Ask students to look at the questions in Before
<i>you read, page 119, working in pairs to discuss </i>
<i>the question in Before you read:</i>
- Call a pair to report their discussion
- Look at the picture and answer the
questions:
<i>.</i>
<b>While- </b>
<b>reading</b>
(30
min.)
- Teach some new words: ask students whether
they know the words, if they do not know them,
explain in English then ask them to give
Vietnamese equivalents to check their
understanding
- <i>vertical</i>
- <i>cap</i>
- <i>sprint</i>
- <i>opponent</i>
- <i>punch</i>
- Let the whole class read the new words twice or
three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again.
- Give Vietnamese equivalents
- Read the words
<b>Task 1</b>
<b>Task 2</b>
<b>Task 3</b>
- Ask students to read the passage in silence
- Ask students to do Task 1:
<i>Find the words in the passage that can match with</i>
<i>the definition on the right column.</i>
-Ask students to discuss the answers in pairs.
- Ask individuals to do the Task 1
- Write down the answers on the board.
<i>7. eject</i>
<i>8. sprint</i>
<i>9. foul</i>
- Check students’ understanding of the words by
asking them to give the Vietnamese equivalents
- Let the whole class read the new words twice or
three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again
- Ask students to do task 2 in groups:
<i>Answer the questions according to the passage.</i>
- Go around to supervise students if necessary.
- Ask representatives of groups to answer the
questions. If students’ answers are right, repeat
them, if not, give the right answers.
<i>5. Where can people play water polo?</i>
<i>6. Where is the ball when the game start /</i>
<i>7. How can the ball be advanced?</i>
<i>8. Which players are allowed to hold the ball</i>
<i>with both hands?</i>
<i>9. What happens to the player who commits </i>
<i>five personal fouls/</i>
<i>10. How long does the game of water polo </i>
- If students’ answers are right, repeat them, if not,
give the right answers.
- Ask students to do After you read in pairs:
<i>Scan the text to find information to complete the </i>
<i>note.</i>
- Go around to supervise them. Note down the
serious and common mistakes
- Call some pairs to read their note.
- If students’ answers are right, repeat them, if not,
give the right answers
Ask
- Discuss the answers in pairs.
- Give the answers.
- Write down the answers
- Read the words
- Do task 2 in groups
- Answer the questions
- Do the Task in pairs.
<i>.</i>
<b>Post- </b>
<b>reading</b>
(10min.
)
- Ask students to do After you read in groups
<i>What are the advantages of robots? </i>
<i>What are the disadvantages of robots?</i>
(write the answers on the board)
- Go around to supervise them. Note down serious
- Do After you read in groups
<b>Home </b>
<b>work</b>
( 1 min)
and common mistakes.
- Ask one group to report what they have
discussed
- Give feedback and correct some serious or
- Read the passage again
- Emphasize words and structures in the passage
<i>beings in many fields so many people</i>
<i>will lose their jobs or go jobless</i>
- Report what they have discussed
- Listen to the feedback and correct
their mistakes
<b>B. Speaking</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can ask and answer about changes of people and the world in the future.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
<b> III. Procedures</b>
Stages <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Warm </b>
<b>up</b>
( 2 min.)
<b>While- </b>
<i><b>Task 1</b></i>
(13 min.)
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
(16 min.)
- Tell students a riddle
+ Ask students the question:
<i>-Do you like sport ?</i>
<i>- What kind of sport do you like ? </i>
- Introduce the lesson:
- Introduce some new words (eliciting, give
the definitions in English then ask students to
translate them into Vietnamese to check their
understanding)
- <i>scuba-diving</i>
- <i>-windsurfing</i>
- synchronized swimming
- rowing
- Let the whole class read the new words
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again.
- Ask students to look at Task 1
- Ask students to do Task 1:
Ask sts to work impairs: Look at the pictures
and match the names with the appropriate
water sports
1- swimming
1- water polo
3- synchronized swimming
4- windsurfing
6-rowing
- Walk around the class to guide or supervise
them and give them help if necessary.
- Ask some pairs to report what they have
talked
- Give comments; correct the common
mistakes after they finish.
<i>- Ask students to do Task 2 in pairs, k at the </i>
<i>table and talk about each of water sports</i>
<i>Example ;Water polo is played in a pool . It is</i>
<i>played with aball and people play it in a team</i>
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes
- Listen to the riddle
- Answer the question
.
- Listen to the teacher and write the
title in their notebooks.
- Listen to the teacher.
- Guess the meaning of the new words.
- Read the new words
- Look at Task 1
- Do Task 1
<i>We use “will+be+V_ing.”</i>
<i>-Read the example</i>
- Do Task 2 in pairs
<b>Post- </b>
<i>- Ask students to do Task 3:: making some </i>
<i>more predictions about what life will be like </i>
<i>one hundred years from now.( work in groups</i>
<i>of 4) </i>
- After about 3 minutes of discussion, call
some groups to report what they have done
- After students finish, give them comments:
correct some pronunciation mistakes they
have made
- Read aloud the words and ask the whole
class to repeat
- Report what they have talked.
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes.
<i>It is likely that+ clause</i>
<i>It is unlikely that+ clause</i>
<i>It is possible that+ clause</i>
<i>It is impossible that+ clause</i>
<i>Because+ clause</i>
<i>Because of+ Noun phrase</i>
<i>Since/As + clause</i>
<i>For+ Noun phrase</i>
<i>As a result of</i>
<i>Thanks to+ Noun phrase</i>
<i>In my opinion</i>
<i>from my point of view</i>
<i>As far as I am concerned.</i>
<i>I think</i>
<i>I believe</i>
- Listen to the teacher
- Do Task 2 in pairs
- One student repeats the teacher’s
instruction.
- The others listen to their friends to
make clear about what they have to do
- Some pairs report
- Repeat after the teacher
- Work in groups to do Task 3
- Some groups report what they have
<i>I think it is likely by the end of 2106, </i>
<i>scientists will have found a cure for </i>
<i>AIDS thanks to the developments of </i>
<i>science and technology</i>
- Listen to the teacher
<b>C. Listening </b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can improve their listening skill: they can understand the passage about life
expectancy.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Tapes and cassette
- Handouts
<b> III. Procedures</b>
Stages <b>Teacher’ activities</b> <b>Learners’ activities</b>
<b>Warm </b>
<b>up</b>
( 7 min.)
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>listening</b>
- Let students play a game
- Introduce the game rule:
This is Lucky number game. We have four
teams. I will give a definition, and you have to
give the word it refers to. You have to raise
your hand to answer the question.
Who raises the hand first will have the right to
answer the question.
If your answer is right, you will get one point.
If not, the other team will answer the question.
The team which gets the true answer can
choose the next question, if it is a lucky
number, that team will get 2 points.
- Let Ss play
- Ask students to do Task 1:
Discuss the question: Which of the following
factors do you think might help people have a
long and healthy life?
+ No smoking? Why?
+ Love a lot? Why?
- Ask one pair to report what they have
discussed.
- Introduce some new words (eliciting, give the
definitions in English then ask students to
translate them into Vietnamese to check their
understanding)
- incredible(adj. ): impossible or very
difficult to believe
- centenarian(adj. ):belong to the century,
- Listen to the instruction
- Do Task 1 in pairs
S1: Which factors do you think
might help people to have a long
and healthy life/
S2: I think they are no smoking,
eating healthy food, laughing a lot,
and doing exercise because by
doing so, we can improve our
health.
- Listen to the teacher.
<b></b>
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
<i><b>( 12 </b></i>
<i><b>min.)</b></i>
<b>Post- </b>
<b>listening</b>
<b>( 10 </b>
<b>min.)</b>
100 years
- eradicate(v): to destroy or get rid of sth
completely
- life expectancy(n): the number of years
that a person is likely to live
- eternal life(n): life without beginning or
end; existing or continuing for ever
- mushroom(v):rise quickly
- curable(adj.): (used about a disease) that
can be made better
- Let the whole class read the new words twice
or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again.
- Ask students to read the statements in Task 1.
- Ask students to listen to the passage the first
time:
Listen to an interview about people’s life
expectancy in the future, listen and decide
whether the statements are true or false.
- Play the tape or read the passage twice
- Ask some students to give their answers. Ask
them to give reason for their answers. If their
answers are right, repeat them; if not give the
correct answers.
- Ask them to listen again the second and the
third time to finish Task 2: answer the
questions
- Ask students to discuss the answers to the
questions in pairs.
- Go around to supervise students if necessary.
- Call some students to give the answers. If
their answers are right, repeat the answers, if
- If most students do not catch the information
for the questions, let them listen again to the
passage once more.
4. What are factors that help people have
longer life expectancy according to Dr.
Davis?
5. Which factor is the most important one?
Why?
6. What will we have been able to do about
AIDS in ten years’ time?
- Ask students to do After you listen in
- Read the new words
- Read the statements in Task 1.
- Listen to the passage and answer
the questions
2. F(Some scientists can
predict)
5. F(Because we look after
ourselves, eat more
healthily, cut down on
6. F(80)
7. T
8. T
- Listen again the third time to
finish the Task.
- Discuss the answers to the
questions in pairs.
- Answer the questions, and correct
the wrong answers.
4. Eating more healthily, cutting
down on things like butter,
alcohol and cigarettes.
5. The development in medical
science.
6. In ten years’ time AIDS will
also be brought under
groups
Work in groups and the advantages and
disadvantages of having a very long life.
What are the disadvantages of having a very
long life. (write the answers on the board)
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes.
- Ask one group to report what they have
discussed
- Give comments after they finish
- Call another group if there is enough time
- Give feedback and correct serious or common
mistakes
Advantages:
- Do many things they want
to do/ enjoy life more
- See their children and
grandchildren grow up
- Help their children and
grandchildren
- Children and grandchildren
are happy with them
Disadvantages:
- Too weak to do things and
often ill
- Feel lonely when children
have grown up and busy
with their own lives, and
friends are dead.
- Do the task in groups
- Report what they have discussed
- Listen to the teacher and correct
the mistakes
<b>Games</b>
Lucky number
15. Pessimists: a person who always thinks that bad things will happen or that sth will be
not be successful
<b>16. Lucky number</b>
17. Economic depression: a period when the economic situation is bad, with little business
activity and many people without a job
18. Terrorism: the killing of ordinary people for political purposes
<b>19. Lucky number</b>
20. Wipe st out: to destroy sth completely
21. Corporation(n): a large business company
<b>22. Lucky number</b>
23. Chore(n): a job that is not interesting but that you must do
24. Burden(n): something that is heavy and difficult to carry
25. Influence(v): to have an effect on or power over sb/sth so that he/she/it changes
<b>26. Lucky number</b>
27. Methane(n): a gas without colour or smell, that burns easily and that we can use to
produce heat
<b>D. Writing</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- Students can write about the ideal world in which they would like to live in the year
2020.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
III. Procedures
Stages Teacher’s activities <b>Students’ activities</b>
<b>Pre- </b>
<b>writing</b>
( 10 min.)
<i><b>Task 1:</b></i>
<b>While- </b>
<b>writing</b>
- Write on the board the title of the lesson: Unit
8: Life in the future.
Part D. Writing
- Introduce some new words and expressions
- Under the threat of terrorism: trong sự đe
doạ của chủ nghÜa khđng bè
- Live in harmony: sèng hoµ thn
- Live in clean healthy environment: sèng
trong m«i trêng trong sạch, lành mạnh.
- My main desire is : mong ớc, khát vọng
chính của tôi là..
- Materialistic (a): theo chđ nghÜa vËt chÊt,
nỈng vỊ vËt chÊt
- Let the whole class read the new words twice
or three times.
- Call 2-3 students to read new words again.
- Ask students to read the passage to analyze
it.
- Ask students to discuss the answers to the
questions in pairs.
- Go around to supervise students if necessary.
- Call some students to give the answers. If
their answers are right, repeat the answers, if
they are wrong, give them the answers:
1.What are the student’s concerns about?
World peace?
Employment?
The environment?
The people ?
2. Are your concerns similar to those?
3. Do you have other concerns? What are they?
- Ask students to do Task 2 individually.
¦rite about the ideal world in which you would
like to live in the year 2020 using the ideas you
have discussed in Task 1
- Write down in the notebooks the
title.
- Listen to the teacher
- Read the words
- Read the passage to analyze it.
- Discuss the answers to the questions
in pairs.
- Answer the questions, and correct
the wrong answers.
- World peace: peaceful world, no
war, no conflicts, no threat of
terrorism, people love in harmony
- Employment: everyone has a job.
- Environment: clean and healthy, less
noise, less pollution, larger parks,
wildlife is protected.
- People: less materialistic, less
selfish, less violent, and more loving.
Yes, they are.
Yes, I wish people can do the job that
they like, and they no longer suffer
from fatal diseases.
( 20 min.)
<i><b>Task 2</b></i>
<b>Post- </b>
<b>writing</b>
( 15 min.)
Try to use the expression like: my main desire
is to…., I would also wish…
- Go around to supervise them. Note down
serious and common mistakes.
- Show and correct some common mistakes
- Ask students to exchange their work to check
- Ask students to revise their description
- Ask students to hand in their work to mark
- Write the description
- Listen to the teacher and correct the
mistakes
- Exchange the writing
- Revise their description.
<b>E. Language focus</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
1. Pronunciation
- <i>Students can pronounce correctly the contracted forms of auxiliaries(have and has)</i>
2. Grammar
- Students know how to use articles and.
- Students know how to use some preposition phrases.
<b>II. Aids</b>
- English textbook for students
- English textbook for teachers
- Pictures
<b> III. Procedures</b>
Stages <b>Teacher’s activities</b> Students’ activities
<b>Pronun </b>
<b>ciation</b>
( 7 min.)
<b>Listen </b>
<b>and </b>
<b>repeat</b>
<b>Practice</b>
<b>Grammar</b>
<b>and </b>
<b>vocabular</b>
<b>y</b>
(38 min.)
<i><b>Exercise 1</b></i>
(20 min.)
- Pronounce the auxiliaries both contracted
forms and full forms for students to
recognize the difference
- Pronounce the second time for the students
to repeat.
- Ask 2-3 students to repeat, correct their
mispronounce
- Read 2 times the sentences, and then let the
whole class read the sentences twice or three
times.
- Put stress mark for them to practice
- Call 2-3 students to read the sentences
again.
- Ask them to read the sentences in pairs, go
around to supervise them.
- Ask students to look at examples in
exercise
<i> - Ask students to do exercise 1: combine the</i>
<i>sentences with although / even though</i>
- Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to discuss the answers in
pairs.
- Listen to the teacher
- Read after the teacher
- Read the sentences twice or three
times
- Read the sentences again.
- Read the sentences in pairs.
<i>- Do Exercise 1</i>
<i><b>Exercise 2</b></i>
(18 min.)
- Call some students to give their answers. If
students’ answers are right, repeat them, if
not, give the right answers
<i>- Revise the use of articles.</i>
- Ask students to do Exercise 2
<i>Put a/an, the or No article ( #) in each </i>
<i>space.</i>
- Go around to supervise them
- Ask students to discuss the answers in
pairs.
- Call some students to give their answers. If
students’ answers are right, repeat them, if
not, give the right answers
- Give the answers
<i>12. in (in time for = early enough)</i>
<i>(“on time” doesn’t go with </i>
<i>“for” or “to”)</i>
<i>13. of</i>
<i>14. on (in business = being a </i>
<i>businessman, on business = to </i>
<i>go on business).</i>
<i>15. At</i>
<i>16. to</i>
<i>17. in</i>
<i>20. between, opposite</i>
<i>21. to</i>
<i><b>A/an is used before an indefinite </b></i>
<i>single noun, “the” is used before a </i>
<i>definite noun, “the” is also used </i>
<i>before an musical instruments. We use </i>
<i>zero article before a proper noun or </i>
<i>some structures such as by+ (means of</i>
<i>transport) and last+ (time)…</i>
- Do Exercise 2
- Discuss the answers in pairs
- Give the answers
<b>UNIT 13: THE 22nd <sub>SEA GAMES</sub></b>
<b>Lesson 1: </b> <b>Reading</b>
<b>I. Aim: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to</b>
- Scan for specific information
- Give vietnamese equivalents to words and phrases
- Answer the questions
<b>II. Teaching aids: pictures, posters..</b>
<b>III. Stages</b>
<b>Time Contents</b> <b>T’s acts</b> <b>Ss’acts</b>
4’ <b>I. Warm up: Chatting</b>
(Picture)
1.What event was it ?
<b>2.Where do you think the event took place ?</b>
-showing the picture of the 22nd
SEA Games and Asking some qs
-leading in
14’
20’
<b>3.Which sports do you think are the </b>
strongest of Vietnam?
<b>II. Pre –reading</b>
<b>Vocabulary</b>
to host
to compete
competitor (n)
energetic (adj)
composed (adj)
facility (n)
Checking R & R
<b>* Task 1 Matching</b>
<b> A</b>
<b>1.The 22</b>nd<sub> SEA Games were held in </sub>
Vietnam from...
<b>2.Thailand was ranked second with....</b>
<b>3.Singapore and Vietnam had participants </b>
who were awarded the Most Outstanding
Athlete tiltes in...
<b>4.A plan has been proposed for Vietnam to </b>
host the Asia Sports Games at....
<b> B</b>
<b>a.90 gold medals.</b>
<b>b.the Swimming and Shooting Events.</b>
<b>c.the 5</b>th<sub> to 13</sub>th<sub> December,2003.</sub>
<b>d.some point in the future.</b>
<b>e.a big sports event</b>
Keys: 1c-2a-3d-4d
<b>III.While –reading</b>
<b>Task 2 </b>
Give the vietnamese equivalents to the
following words and phrases.(p140)
Keys: 1.Nguoi say me the thao
2.Doan ket
3.Danh hieu
4.The duc the hinh
5.Tinh than cao
6.Dong bao
<b>* Task 3</b>
Answer the questions (p140)
Keys :
<b>1.It was solidality,cooperation for peace </b>
and development.
<b>2.444 gold medals were won at the S.G</b>
<b>3.The Vietnamese Women’s Football team </b>
successfully defended the SEA Games tilte.
<b>4.The Thai Men’s Football team won the </b>
-providing the new words
-showing the poster
-asking ss to close the book
-asking ss to work in pairs
-asking ss to open their book to
read and check the predictions
-giving the direction
-asking ss to work in pairs
-feed back
-asking ss to work in groups
-feed back
-asking ss to work in groups and
take notes their ideas
-listening &
repeating
-looking
-closing the
books
-pairworking
-predicting
-opening the
-groupworking
-copying
-discussing to
answer the qs
6’
gold medal.
5.It was because firstly, to prepare for the
22nd<sub> SEA Games,Vietnam carried out an </sub>
intensive programme for its athletes,which
included training in facilities,both home
and abroad; secondly with the strong
support of their countrymen, the
Vietnamese athletes competed in high
spirits.
<b>IV.Post-reading</b>
<b> (Exhibition)</b>
Name some of the Vietnamese athletes
you love.Say what they are famous for,and
<b>V.Homework</b>
Revise voc and the main ideas
Prepare next part ( Speaking)
-giving comments
-giving the direction
-helping
-asking each group to choose the
MC
-giving comments
-writing on
the board
-copying
down
-discussing
-writing on
the posters
-showing on
the board
-going around
<b>UNIT 13:THE 22nd <sub>SEA GAMES</sub></b>
<b>Lesson 2: </b> <b>Speaking</b>
<b>I. Aims: At the end of the lession, ss wil be able to be expected to report some of the records</b>
at the 22nd<sub> SEA Games the sports results of the match.After that, they can use it in the real </sub>
life.
<b>II. Teaching aids: pictures, wallchart, ..</b>
<b>Teaching method: </b>
<b>III. Stages:</b>
<i>Tim</i>
<i>e</i> <b>Contents</b> <b>T’s activities</b> Ss’activities
8
10
<b>I.Warm up Pyramid</b>
( each picture = 10 ms )
<b>II.Pre-speaking </b>
<b>Listen and repeat</b>
<b>Athletics Marathon Boonthung </b>
-dividing the class into 2
groups
-asking the presentative of
each group to pick one
picture.
-declaring the winner.
20
7
<b>Erni Amri Ruphai </b>
<b>Yurita Maria Dannal Febri</b>
<b> III.While-speaking. LUCKY STARS</b>
<b>Task 2</b>
( These are some sports got the records at the
22nd<sub> Sea Games.Here is the table of the </sub>
records.)
<i><b>Example: Boonthung, the Thai,won the men’s</b></i>
<i>200 metres.He ran 200 metres in 20.14 </i>
<i>seconds….</i>
<b>IV.Post-speaking</b>
<b>Task 3 Step by Step</b>
(Make a report on the sports results,using the
information in the scoreboard.)
<i><b>Example: Vietnam and Myanmar played in </b></i>
<i>the Women’s Football Final. The Vietnamese </i>
<i>team won the gold medal.The result (The </i>
<i>score ) was 2-1.</i>
…………
<b>V. Homework</b>
-asking ss to work in groups
of 4 ss.
-running through the table.
-giving the direction.
-giving the model.
-going around to help ss
-asking some ss to report.
-giving
Comments
-asking ss to work in groups
of 4 ss.
-running through the table.
-giving the direction.
-checking
-giving ss 5 minutes to work.
-calling some ss to report in
front of the class.
-giving comments.
<b>Unit 13. THE 22nd<sub> SEA GAMES</sub></b>
<b>Lesson 3: Listening</b>
<b>II. Skill: Listening and answering questions; deciding on True/False statements.</b>
<b>Method: Communicative approach.</b>
<b>III. Teaching aids: textbook, tape, cassette player, pictures, </b>
<b>IV. Procedure.</b>
<b>Time Contents</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Ss’ act</b>
3’
4’
7’
4’
10’
<b>* Warm – up:</b>
Tell some games which are competed in the
22nd<sub> Sea Games</sub>
<b>* Pre - listening</b>
Work in pairs. Ask and answer the following
questions
<b>Vocabulary</b>
clear (v) (picture)
break (v) (explanation)
be over: end (synonym)
deal (n) (translation)
<b>Listen and repeat. (P.142)</b>
<b>* While – listening.</b>
<b>Task 1: Listen to the first newspaper article </b>
about Amnat, the winner in the 22nd<sub> Southeast </sub>
Asian Games Pole Vaulting competition, and
choose the correct answer.
1. Amnat won ____ gold medal(s) in the Pole
Vaulting competition.
A. ten B. one C. three D. four
2. He comes from ____.
A. Singapore B.Indonesia
C. Thailand D. Malaysia
3. He cleared ____ metres.
A.4.40 B.4.18 C.4.08 D. 4.80
4.The Sea Games record was __________.
<b> A. 5,50m B. 5,15m C. 5,05m D. 5,35m</b>
<b>Key: 1B 2C 3D 4C</b>
- says
- introduces new lesson
- gives instruction
- explains
- calls ss to answer
follows steps to present new
words
- reads firstly and asks ss to
repeat 2 or 3 times
- corrects mistakes if
necessary
- runs through the words
- gives instruction
- asks ss to read the sentences
- plays the tape 2 times
- calls ss to give answers
- gives feedback
listen
speak
listen
pairwork
speak
listen
repeat
copy
listen
- read
- listen
speak
<b>Time Content</b> <b>Teacher’s acts</b> <b>Ss’ acts</b>
10’
1’
<b>Task 2: P 143</b>
<b>Key: 1T 2F 3T 4T 5F</b>
<b>* Post listening: P 143</b>
Work in groups. Discuss the following
question: Which Vietnamese footballer(s) do you
like best ? Why ?
<b>* Homework:</b>
Prepare writing
- explains
- asks ss to read the
statements and guess whether
they are True or False in pairs
- plays the tape 2 times
- calls ss to give answers
- gives feedback
-explains
- goes around to check
- call ss to present in front of
class
read
<b>Unit 13. THE 22nd<sub> SEA GAMES</sub></b>
<b>Lesson 4: Writing.</b>
<b>I) Aims: Describing a Sporting event (a football match)</b>
<b>II) Teaching aids: teacher’s book, text book</b>
<b>III) Stage:</b>
<b>Time Contents</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Ss’ act</b>
5’
5’
10’
<b>I) Warm up: “Hat magic”</b>
This is a kind of Sport that is well-known
in the world
<b>II) Pre – writing</b>
<b>* Task 1: Arrange these questions in </b>
<b>A) Introduction</b>
4.
7.
3.
<b>B) Details of the match</b>
6.
1.
8.
9.
<b>10.</b>
<b>C) Conclusion</b>
2.
5.
<b>* Task 2: Ask and answer the above </b>
questions
- Gives the introduction to play this
game.
- Divides class into 2 proups
- Asks students to guess the name of
- Shows the picture of a football team
and asks “who are they?”- How many
people are there in a football team?
- To have a match what must we do?
- Have you ever seen football match?
- How is the football match process?
- Asks students to work in groups of
four
- Writes these questions in the cards
and gives each group a card.
- Asks students to discuss in groups
and decide section
- Checks
- Asks students to work in proups of
three. (talk about the match you saw)
- Goes around for helping
- Calls one of these groups to go to
the board and write the anwers.
- Checks
- Helps students to understand clearly
about meaning of these words or
- Asks students to write individually.
- listen
- A B
- Guess
- Answer
(footballers)
- Answer
(eleven)
- Answer
(invite
another team,
give reason,
time, place
…)
- Answer
- Answer
- Group work
- receive
- Discuss and
stick in the
section that
they think it
suitable
- take note.
15’
8’
2’
* Useful language
<b>III) While writing:</b>
<b>* Task 3: Write a description of the </b>
football match mentioned above.
<b>IV) Post – writing:</b>
<b>V). Homework:</b>
- Rewrite the description of the football
match at home
- Prepare langguage focus.
Using the answers and language in
the box, or in task 3
- receives the writing.
- exchanges the writing each other to
correct
- Gives the explaination to correct
+ Ideas
+ Contents
+ Grammar
+ Spellings
- Asks students to rewrite the
description and prepare language
focus
note
- write on the
board
- take note
- listen and
ask
- Individual
student
writes
- Give the
writing
- receive the
writing to
correct
- listen and
take note
<b>Unit 13: THE 22nd <sub>SEA GAME</sub></b>
Lesson 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS
* Objective:
<b>I. Aim: - Sts can practise linking</b>
- Sts review and practise: Double comparison
<b>II. Teaching aids: Text book, projector, pictures (if possible)</b>
<b>III. Procedures: </b>
<b>Time Content</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Sts’ activities</b>
4’
5’
<b>I/ Warmer: using pictures</b>
1. Where does she come from?
She comes fromVAustralia
2. What is she doing?
She is taking partVin an English
speaking club.
<b>II/ New lesson: </b>
<i><b>1/ Pronunciation: Linking</b></i>
- ThinkVof you!
- GiveVup smoking!
<i><b>* Form: -Consonant + vowel</b></i>
<i><b> -Vowel + vowel</b></i>
<i><b>* Practice: (page 145)</b></i>
1. ……lookVat………
2 ……..tookVoff…….
3. ……..quiteVold…….
-Stick picture
-Call a good student
-Checking
-Read linking
-Using the picture (card)
-Explaining
-Running through
-Look at the picture
-Answer the
question
-Listening
- Choral
- Group
- Individual
15’
15’
4. ……..fromVAustralia……
5………friendsVin……….
6………..
<i><b>2/ Grammar: </b></i>
* Pre-vocabulary:
One syllable Many syllables
Tall
Fat
Hot
Warm
Cold
Comfortable
Studious
Intelligent
Beautiful
<i><b>a/ Situation 1: Using sub- board</b></i>
* What will happen with Mai?
Everyday, “ I eat 2 loaves of bread, I have
meat, chicken and a little rice for lunch. I
drink a lot of milk in the evening. I don’t
like fruit and vegetables”
* Mai will get fat
Mai is getting fatter and fatter
The more she eats, the fatter she will
become
<i><b> b/ Situation 2: </b></i>
* How is the prize of travelling?
“Two years ago, I went to HaNoi by plane.
I spent 600.000 dong for the return ticket.
Now, everything is different. It takes me
nearly 1.000.000 dong to fly there”.
<i><b>* Travelling by train is becoming more </b></i>
<i><b>and more expensive.</b></i>
<i><b>- The more expensive travelling is, the </b></i>
<i><b>more boring passengers become.</b></i>
<i><b>*Form: </b></i>
- Short adj:
<i><b> short adj + er and short adj + er</b></i>
<i><b> the adj + er, the adj + er</b></i>
- Long adj:
<i><b> the more + adj, the more adj </b></i>
* Examples:
-The weather gets warmer and warmer
-He is more and more studious.
-The darker it gets, the colder it is
-The more difficult the lesson is, the more
dispirited the students.
<i><b>3/ Practice: </b></i>
<i><b>a/ Exercise 1: Matching (page 146)</b></i>
* Keys: 1 – c ; 2- e ; 3 – a; 4 – b; 5 – d; 6 –
g; 7 – f
<i><b>b/ Exercise 2: Using the structure </b></i>
comparative and comparative
* Keys:
- Read each sentence 2 or 3
times
- Explain the difference of
“one or two syllable”
- Stick
- Cues
- Explaining
- Correcting
- Cues
- Explaining
- Correcting
- Explaining
- Call sts go to the board
-Using sub-board
-Running through
- Checking the right
- Call sts go to the board
-Correcting
-Call sts go to the board
- Look
- Read
- Individual
- Look
- Read
- Individual
- Pay attention
- Put the sentence
on the board
- Pay attention
- Go to the board
- Copy
-Give example
-Copy down
-Working in pairs
5’
1’
1……shorter and shorter
2……more and more expensive
3……worse and worse
4……more and more complicated
5…….better and better
6…….more and more active
7……more and more difficult
8. ….closer and closer
<i><b>c/ Exercise 3: </b></i>
Using the structure the + comparative, the
+ comparative
*Keys:
1. ….the better I feel
2……the faster you will learn
3…….the more impatient he became
4……the higher your bill will be
5……the better the service
6…….the more I liked him
7. ….the more you want
<b>III/ Complete each of the following </b>
<b>sentences: </b>
1. Mr Nam / faster / drives / and / faster /
2. Jane / beautiful / become / more and
more /
3. They / get / the fatter / the weak / they /
feel /
4. The lesson / is / the more difficult / we
try / the harder /
<b>IV/ Homework: </b>
- Learn by heart “Double comparison”
- Prepare the next lesson
-Checking
-Call sts go to the board
-Checking
-Using the sub-board
-Call sts practice
-Correcting
-Write on the board
-Open the book
-Rewrite the
sentences
-Working in group
of 4
-Stick on the board
-Copy and carry out
<b>Unit 14 INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS</b>
<b>Lesson 1: READING</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
To help students gain knowledge of some international organizations and
their roles in the world.
To enable students to read for gist and to scan for specific details.
<b>II. Method and teaching aids: Integrated, mainly communicative</b>
Pictures of the logos of relevant international organizations
<b>III. Procedure:</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’ Activities</b>
<i><b>Warm-up (5 mn)</b></i>
Teacher (T) guides students (Ss) to look at the
logo of the United Nations and those of some
other organizations and answer the guiding
questions.
1. What organizations do these logos
Students look at the pictures and answer the
questions based on their background
knowledge.
represent?
2. What roles do they play in the world?
Organization, World Health Organization,
etc.
2. Their roles are to improve different
aspects of life, i.e., health, education,
children’s condition of living, trade, etc.,
in the world.
<b>Pre-reading (20 mn) </b>
a) T has Ss work in pairs, match the logos with
corresponding names and then read the
names of the organizations aloud.
b) T has Ss discuss in pairs and find out the
difference in meaning between ‘abbreviation’
and ‘acronym.’
Ss sit in pairs and do the task assigned by T.
<i> Answer</i>
1. D 2. E 3. F 4. A 5. C 6. B
Students work in pairs and do task b).
<i>Answer</i>
acronym: a word formed from the
first letters of the words that make up the
name of something.
Example: World Health Organization =
WHO, pronounced / hu: /
abbreviation: short form of a word
Example: UN, pronounced /ju: ‘en /
1. United Nations: UN (abbr.) /ju: ‘en /
(Liªn hiƯp qc).
2. United Nations Children’s Fund:
UNICEF (acr.) /ju:nisef/ (Quỹ Nhi Đồng
Liên HiÖp Quèc)
3. Food and Agriculture Organization: FAO
/,ef ei ‘ou / ( Tổ chức lơng thực và Nông
nghiệp thÕ giíi)
4. World Health Organization:WHO /hu:/
5. World Trade Organization:
WTO /, d blju: ti: ou/ (Tổ chức
th-ơng mại thế giíi)
6. International Civil Aviation Organization:
<i><b>While-reading (45 mn)</b></i>
a) Find the words in the reading which mean:
T has Ss work individually, do the task by
looking through the text and find the meanings
of the words in context,
then do the matching task.
Ss work individually, then compare their
answers in pairs.
<i>Answer</i>
1. permanent (par. A)
2. eligible (par. A)
3. promote (par. B)
4. regulations (par. B)
5. mandate (par. D)
6. originate (par. D)
7. regulate (par. F)
b)
T. has Ss work in pairs, read each paragraph to
scan for specific information, then write the
names of the corresponding international
organization.
Students do task b).
<i>Answer</i>
Paragraph A: UN Security Council
Paragraph C: United Nations Development
Program
Paragraph D: Food and Agriculture
Organization
Paragraph E: World Health Organization
Paragraph F: World Trade Organization
<i>Ghi chuự: UN Security Council = Hi ng </i>
Bảo an Liên hiệp quốc
c)
T. has Ss work in pairs, read the functions
or activities listed in the left column, then
write the corresponding international
organizations in the right column.
Students do task c).
<i>Answer</i>
1. UN Security Council
2. ICAO
3. UNDP 4. WTO
5. FAO 6. WHO
<i><b>Post-reading (18 mn)</b></i>
T has Ss sit in groups of four and
discuss what the above mentioned
international organizations have done in Viet
Nam.
<i><b>Homework: (2 mn)</b></i>
Ss discuss the roles of the above mentioned
international organizations in Viet Nam.
<b>Unit 14 : INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS</b>
<b>Lesson 2: Speaking</b>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- To help students gain knowledge of some international organizations and their roles in
the world.
- To enable students to talk about international organizations
- Report on discussion results
<b>II. Method and teaching aids: Integrated, mainly communicative</b>
Pictures of the logos of relevant international organizations
<b>III. Procedure:</b>
<b>Teacher’s Activities</b> <b>Students’ Activities</b>
<b>Warm up: (5mm)</b>
Use the Photos:
- Makes the questions & ask SS to answer
- lead to the new lesson.
- Look at the photos
- Answer the questions
<b>Pre-speaking: (10 mm)</b>
<b>a. Vocabulary:</b>
- establish (v) - (to) build
- attainment (n): accomplishment & achievement
- carry out (v):
- advocate (v): to recommend or support sth
- endanger (v): to cause danger to sb/sth
b. Checking: ROR
* Discuss the questions (page 155)
1. What does WHO stand for?
2. When was WHO established?
3. What is its major objective?
4. What are its main activities?
Students work in pairs and do task 1).
<i>Answer</i>
1. Who stands for the World Health Organization.
2. It was established on 7 April 1948
3. Its major objective is the attainment by all
peoples of the highest possible level of health
4. Its main activities are carrying out research on
medical development and improving international
health care.
<b>While-speaking: (20 mm)</b>
Task 2:
- Ask SS to ask and answer about the International
organizations.(UNICEF & WWF)
Task 3: Tell a partner what you know about one of
the above mentioned international organization.
Use the information from Task 1 and 2
- Work in pairs & do task 2 (P.156). able to base on
task 1.
- Work in groups
- Give feed back
<b>Post-speaking: (8 mm)</b>
Report to the class
-Ask Ss to tell what they discuss
- Report in front of class.
<b>Homework: (2 mm)</b>
Rewrite the international orgainizations
-Do at home
<b> Unit: 14: INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION</b>
<i><b> Lesson: 3 Listening</b></i>
<b>I. Aims</b>
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will able to get information about the United Nation .
- Developing skills: Multiple – choice questions and Gap – filling.
<b>-II. Method and teaching aids : Textbook, pictures, cassette player, tape .</b>
<b>III. Procedure :</b>
<b>Tim</b>
<b>e</b> <b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher ‘s Activities</b> <b>Students’ Activities</b>
3’
10’
<b>I/ Warm- up: (Picture on P 156) </b>
Questions
1/Where is building?
2/ How popular is the United Nations ?
<b>II/ Pre- listening:</b>
Vocabulary: Listen and repeat: (P 157)
- leader (n)
- goals and purposes (n)
- to work together for
- Ask questions
- Help Ss answer the
question
- Follow the steps for
presenting vocabulary
- Play tape 1 or 2 times
- Give their
answers
- Take some notes
-Listen
- repeat
10’
15’
5’
2’
- be at war
<b>III/ While- listening: (P 157)</b>
<b> Task 1: Listen and circle the best answer:</b>
Key :
1. C 2. D 3. C
<b> Task 2: ( P 157)</b>
Key:
1. solve international problems
3. in its goals
4. at war
5. independence
<b>IV/ Post- listening:</b>
- UN: United Nations
- UNICEF: United Nations International
Children’ s Emergency Fund.
- WHO: World Health Organisation.
<b>V/ Homework:</b>
Writing:
What do you know about the United Nations ?
- Play tape one more
times
- Call some Ss to
answer
- correct
-Explain some new
words
- Play tape 2 times
- Help
- Explain
- Give assignment
- Read 1 or 2
minutes
- Correct the
answers with their
classmates
- Give their
decision
- Take notes
-listen
- Do the task
- Give the answer
-work
- Take notes
- Copy
<b>Unit: 14: INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION</b>
<i><b>Lesson 4 : Writing</b></i>
<b>I. Aim : By the end of the lesson, Ss will able to write a short description of an </b>
international organisation .
<b>II. Method and teaching aids : Textbook, pictures .</b>
<b>III. Procedure :</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>Stages</b> <b>Teacher ‘s Activities</b> <b>Students’ </b>
<b>Activities</b>
3’
10’
<b>I/ Warm- up: (Picture about WWF,WHO, </b>
UN on P 152)
<b>II/ Pre- Writing:</b>
Vocabulary:
- have an opportinities (v.ph)
- do research on (v.ph)
- be good at (v.ph)
- charity (n)
- Ask Ss to give some
related to
- Help Ss
- Follow the steps for
- Give their words
- Take some notes
-Listen
- repeat
10’
15’
5’
2’
<b>Task 1: Discuss the question ( p 158)</b>
<i><b>Model :</b></i>
Ss 1: Which international organisations would
you like to work for, WWF, WHO, UN ?
Ss2: I like to work for WHO.
Ss3: Why do you choose to work for WHO ?
Ss2: Because I like biology and I’m very good
at it . If I work for WHO, I will have a chance
to do much medical research and help improve
international health care. I will meet people
from difference countries in the world and I
will speake English at work.
<b>III/ While- Writing: (P 157)</b>
<b> Task 2: ( P 158)</b>
<i><b> Model :</b></i>
I like to work for the WHO for the number of
reasons. First, I really like biology and I’m very
good at it . If I work for WHO, I will have a
chance to do much medical research and help
improve international health care. Second, I
will meet people from difference countries in
the world and I will speake English at work.
Third, …….
………
.
………
………
<b>IV/ Post- writing:</b>
<b> V/ Homework:</b>
Write a paragraph of about 100 words
expressing the reasons why you choose the
organisation.( WWF,WHO, UN,ASIAN )
- Ask Ss to work in
group
- Go around for help
voc., grammar .
- Call some Ss to make
conversation
- correct
- Give instruction
- Make a model
- Go around for help
-Call some to check
- Correct
- Remark
- Give assignment
- Work in group of
5 .
- Discuss
- Take notes
-listen
- Take notes
- Do the task
- Practise writing
Present
- Take notes
- Copy
<b> </b>
<b>Unit 14: INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION</b>
<b>Lesson 5: Language focus</b>
<b>Aim: Intonation: The falling tune </b>
<b>Gram / Structure: Phrasal Verbs</b>
<b>Aids: Textbook, lesson plan </b>
<b>Procedure:</b>
<b>activities</b>
<i><b>WARM-UP :</b></i>
<i><b>INTONATION :</b></i>
Eg:
- What do you think of it ?
- What does ASEAN stand for ?
The falling tune
<i><b>GRAMMAR :</b></i>
after chăm
sóc
for tìm kiếm
up tra từ
trong từ điển
look into nhìn vào
out nhìn ra,
nhận biết
at nhìn,
ngắm
down nhìn
xuống
<i><b> Phrasal Verbs: là cụm động từ </b></i>
được theo sau bởi một giới từ nhất định
để có được một nghĩa khác (learn by
heart).
- giving some examples related
to the intonation and reading
them as the samples, then
<b>asking Ss the question “What </b>
<b>intonation can I use in here: </b>
<b>the falling tune or the rising </b>
- giving the introduction
- reading from sentence 1 to 8
as models.
- listening to Ss exactly, then
correcting them.
- giving some examples related
to the PHRASAL VERBS
- giving the introduction and
definition.
- supplying Ss the meanings of
the given phrasal verbs in the
box before asking Ss to do
exercise 1, 2, 3.
- writing Ss’ answers on bb,
then correcting them.
- listening to T
carefully,then
nswering T’s
questions.
- listening to T
- observing what T
writes on bb.
Answer keys :
Exercise 1 :
1. give up 6. look up
2. fill in 7. Turn off
3. turn on 8. fill in
4. take off 9. go on
5. wash up 10. Put on
Exercise 2
2. up
3. out 7. down
4. around 8. away
5. on 9. down
6. up 10. on
Exercise 3 :
2. look after
3. takes after 6. try out
4. got over 7. went
off
5. held up
<i><b>HOMEWORK :</b></i>
- asking Ss to learn by heart the
phrasal verbs and preparing
Unit 15 – READING.
<b>Unit 15: WOMEN IN SOCIETY</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: Reading</b></i>
<b> I Aim: By the end of the lesson, students can:</b>
+ use dictionaries to look up the meanings of the words.
+ make intensive reading to find out information in the lesson.
+ practice reading skills such as skimming, clustering.
<b>II Skills: reading, speaking </b>
<b>III Aids: Lesson plan, textbook, available pictures, prepared pictures, other materials.</b>
<b>IV. Procedures:</b>
Time Content Teacher’s activities Students’
activities
3’
3’
I:WARM-UP:
<b>Short conversation with a school girl </b>
<b>about her/her mother’s daily routines, </b>
<b>activities at home and in society.</b>
II: PRE-TEACHING:
<i>A: Pre-reading:</i>
<b>Look at the pictures and answer the </b>
<b>questions that follow: (page 162)</b>
<b>a) How many roles does this woman have?</b>
<b>b) Is her life typical of a Vietnamese </b>
<b>woman’s life? Why / Why not?</b>
<b>c) In your opinion, what is a typical </b>
<b>Making questions</b>
<b>1. Showing the pictures. </b>
<b>Asking </b>
<b>2. Asking students to </b>
<b>look at the pictures at </b>
<b>page 162. making </b>
<b>questions.</b>
<b>Giving answers</b>
Time Content Teacher’s activities Students’
activities
<b>Vietnamese woman like?</b>
<i>B: Pre-teaching vocabulary:</i>
<b>civilization (n) civilize (v)</b>
Time Content Teacher’s activities Students’
activities
8’
8’
4’
5’
<b>deep-seated (adj): ăn sâu (vào tiềm </b>
<b>thức), lâu đời.</b>
<b>involvement (n) involve (v)</b>
<b>Age of Enlightment (n.p): Thời đại khai</b>
<b>sáng</b>
<b>philosopher (n): nhà triết học</b>
<b>pioneer (n): a person who is the first to </b>
<b>do something.</b>
<b>advocate (v): agree, support: tán thành</b>
<b>disciminate (v) discrimination (n)</b>
<b>III: WHILE-READING:</b>
Read the passage and do the tasks as orders
below:
<i>Task 1: Read the passage quickly and give </i>
<i>the Vietnamese equivalents to the words and </i>
<i>phrases. (page 163)</i>
<i>*(Students can use dictionaries to look up the</i>
<i>words’ meanings)</i>
<i>Key: </i>
1: nền văn minh nhân loại.
2: việc sinh con, việc mang thai.
3: sự tham gia.
4: thời đại khai sáng.
5: những niềm tin ăn sâu vào tiềm thức.
6: việc chăm sóc gia đình.
7: năng lực trí tuệ.
8: cơ hội việc làm bình đẳng.
<i>Task 2: Read the passage carefully and </i>
<i>choose the best option for each question. (page </i>
<i>164)</i>
<i>Key:</i>
1:C 2:D 3:C 4:B 5:A
<i><b>Task 3: Read the passage quickly and </b></i>
<i><b>choose the best title for the passage. (page </b></i>
<i><b>165)</b></i>
<i><b>Key: C: Women’s Rights.</b></i>
IV: POST-READING:
<b>A: Work in groups. Summarise the reading</b>
<b>passage by writing ONE sentence for </b>
<b>each paragraph.</b>
<i>Suggested key:</i>
<b>1. In the past, women were restricted to the</b>
<b>role of mothers and wives due to the </b>
<b>widespread doubt about their intellectual </b>
<b>ability.</b>
<b>2. The struggle for the women’s rights </b>
<b>Translation</b>
<b>Translation</b>
<b>Translation</b>
<b>Asking students to do </b>
<b>individually.</b>
<b>Calling 8 students to give</b>
<b>the key</b>
<b>Giving the suggested </b>
<b>key.</b>
<b>Giving instructions</b>
<b>Asking students to do in </b>
<b>pairs.</b>
<b>Calling 5 students to give</b>
<b>answers</b>
<b>Giving the suggested </b>
<b>key.</b>
<b>Giving instructions</b>
<b>Asking students to do in </b>
<b>groups of 3 or 4.</b>
<i><b>(Teacher’s explanations)</b></i>
<b>Giving instructions</b>
<b>Asking students to do in </b>
<b>groups of 3 or 4.</b>
<b>Giving the suggested </b>
<b>key.</b>
<b>Following. </b>
<b>Listening and </b>
<b>repeating. </b>
<b>Copying.</b>
<b>Listening. </b>
<b>Reading. Doing</b>
<b>the task 1.</b>
<b>Giving the key.</b>
<b>Following and </b>
<b>taking notes.</b>
<b>Reading.</b>
<b>Giving </b>
<b>answers.</b>
<b>Following and </b>
<b>taking notes.</b>
<b>Reading.</b>
<b>Choosing the </b>
<b>title for the </b>
<b>passage</b>
Time Content Teacher’s activities Students’
activities
5’
1’
<b>began in the 18th<sub> century as European </sub></b>
<b>political philosophers believed that women </b>
<b>should be treated equally.</b>
<b>3. Women now enjoy important legal </b>
<b>rights such as equal work opportunities and </b>
<b>equal pay, the right to vote and to gain </b>
<b>education.</b>
<b>B: Suggest a typical Vietnamese woman by </b>
<b>your own thoughts.</b>
V: HOMEWORK:
<b>Study by heart vocabulary.</b>
<b>Preview the next part (Speaking).</b>
<b>Write a short passage about your </b>
<b>thought of your female idol. </b>
Giving command.
Giving comment
Giving assignment
<b>Giving </b>
<b>answers.</b>
<b>Listening and </b>
<b>taking notes</b>
<b>Listening and </b>
<b>taking notes</b>
<b>UNIT 15: WOMEN IN SOCIETY</b>
<i><b>LESSON 2: SPEAKING</b></i>
<b>I. Aims: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to improve their speaking skill and </b>
know some expressions to give the opinions.
<b>II. Skill: speaking</b>
<b>III. Vocabulary: noun, verb, adjective</b>
<b>IV. Teaching aids: pictures, posters, textbook…</b>
<b>V. Procedure :</b>
Time Content Teacher’s activities SS’activities
<b>4’</b>
<b>10’</b>
<b>I.</b> <b>WARM-UP: Matching game</b>
<b> </b>
<b> A B </b>
<b> </b>
<b> D E</b>
<b> 1.Washing the dishes</b>
<b> 2. Washing the clothes</b>
<b> 3. Cleaning the house</b>
<b> 4. Cooking the meal </b>
<b> 5. Going to the supermarket</b>
<b>* Keys: 1.E 2.D 3.B 4. A 5. C</b>
<b>II.</b> PRE -SPEAKING:
<b>* Pre – teach Vocabulary:</b>
<b>- Dividing class into2 </b>
<b>groups.</b>
<b>- Giving the instruction</b>
<b>- Checking and </b>
<b>correcting</b>
<b>- Deciding the winner</b>
<b>-Eliciting new words</b>
<b>- Situation</b>
<b>- Example</b>
<b>-Listening to T’s </b>
<b>instruction</b>
<b>- Matching the picture </b>
<b>with the number</b>
<b>- Checking</b>
<b>-Listening T’s </b>
<b>instructions.</b>
<b>15’</b>
<b>15’</b>
<b>1’</b>
<b>+ neglect (v): sao l·ng</b>
<b>+ rear (v): nu«i dìng</b>
<b>+ slave (n): n« lƯ</b>
<b>+nonsense(n): sù v« lí</b>
<b>+ rubbish (n): vật vô giá trị</b>
<b>* Task 1: Study the expressions and </b>
<b>practise saying them aloud ( p 165)</b>
<b> + Giving your opinion</b>
<b> + Strongly agreeing</b>
<b> + Partly agreeing</b>
<b> + Strongly disagreeing</b>
<b>III.WHILE – SPEAKING :</b>
<b>Task 2: Read and respond to these </b>
<b>statements. Begin your responses with one</b>
<b>of the expressions in Task 1 (p 164)</b>
IV.POST – SPEAKING:
<b> Task 3: Discuss whether you agree or </b>
<b>disagree with the following statement and </b>
<b>give explanation (p166)</b>
V .HOMEWORK:
<b>- Review the learnt lesson</b>
<b>- Prepare the next lesson</b>
<b>- Picture</b>
<b>- Translation</b>
<b>- Synonym</b>
<b>-Giving some expressions</b>
<b>to express the opinions</b>
<b>- Explaining</b>
<b>-Asking ss to practise </b>
<b>- Asking ss to work in </b>
<b>pairs and respond to </b>
<b>these statements in 10’</b>
<b>- Calling some pairs to </b>
<b>demonstrate</b>
<b> - Explaning the task & </b>
<b>giving example</b>
<b>- Asking ss to work in </b>
<b>groups of 4 and discuss </b>
<b>the statement</b>
<b>-Calling some ss to </b>
<b>demonstrate in front of </b>
<b>class</b>
<b>-Writing on the </b>
<b>blackboard</b>
<b>meaning.</b>
<b>- Copying down</b>
<b>- Listening and </b>
<b>repeating</b>
<b>- Listening to T ‘s </b>
<b>- Working in pairs in </b>
<b>10’</b>
<b>- Expressing</b>
<b>- Demonstrating</b>
<b>- Listening T’s </b>
<b>explanation</b>
<b>-Working in groups of 4</b>
<b>- Discussing</b>
<b>-Demonstrating</b>
<b>-Taking note</b>
<b>Unit 15: WOMEN IN SOCIETY</b>
<i><b>Lesson 3: Listening</b></i>
<b>I. Aims: by the end of the lesson, SS will be able to get a general view about a day of</b>
<b>African Women and improve listening-skill.</b>
<b>II. Skills: listening,Writing and Speaking</b>
<b>III. Vocabulary: saying,hold-up,agricultural,firewood,respect and africa</b>
<b>IV. Teaching aids: cassette,picture,poster and text</b>
Procedures
<b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Student’s activities</b>
<b>12’</b>
<b>15’</b>
<b>13’</b>
<b>Matching</b>
<b>a.</b> <b> 1.Vacuum cleaner</b>
<b>b.</b> <b> 2.Washing Machine</b>
<b>c.</b> <b> 3.Electrict cooker</b>
<b>d.</b> <b> 4.Gas stove</b>
<b>II/ Pre-listening</b>
<b>Discuss the question</b>
<b>Is the life of a city woman easier than </b>
<b>that of a village woman nowadays ? why</b>
<b>?</b>
<b>* Pre teach-Vocabulary</b>
<b>-saying</b>
<b>-hold-up</b>
<b>-argricultural</b>
<b>-firewood</b>
<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b> <b>5</b>
<b>B</b> <b>C</b> <b>C</b> <b>A</b> <b>B</b>
<b>Task 2: Listen again then answer </b>
<b>(poster)</b>
<b>Key: </b>
<b>1. 40 %</b>
<b>2. They earn nothing for doing their</b>
<b>domestic work</b>
<b>3. They produce more than half of </b>
<b>the food</b>
<b>4. 80 %</b>
<b>5. At 4.45 am</b>
<b>6. At 9.30 pm</b>
<b>IV/ Post-Listening(poster)</b>
<b>Complete the table about a day work</b>
<b> An African woman A Vietnamese </b>
<b>- T sticks poster on the </b>
<b>board</b>
<b>- Asking ss to devide the </b>
<b>class into 2 teams</b>
<b>-T corrects & decides </b>
<b>what team is the winner</b>
<b>- T asks Ss to work in </b>
<b>pairs and answer the </b>
<b>question</b>
<b>-T asks Ss listen and </b>
<b>repeat</b>
<b>-T explains fast meanings</b>
<b>and use of it</b>
<b>-T explains the request of </b>
<b>the task & asks Ss to do it</b>
<b>- T plays the cassette </b>
<b>player two times</b>
<b>-T asks Ss to answer by </b>
<b>oral talk</b>
<b>-T correct</b>
<b>-T guides Ss to look into </b>
<b>the task and guess the </b>
<b>answer before listening</b>
<b>-T plays the cassette </b>
<b>player two times</b>
<b>-T plays the cassette one </b>
<b>more time and stop after </b>
<b>each question</b>
<b>-T go around to help, if </b>
<b>necessary</b>
<b>-T corrects</b>
<b>-T asks Ss to look at the </b>
<b>poster & works in pairs </b>
<b>to compare about a day </b>
<b>work of An africian </b>
<b>woman with A </b>
<b>vietnamese woman</b>
<b>-Who do work harder </b>
<b>-Ss look at the board</b>
<b>-Ss match</b>
<b>-Work in pairs and </b>
<b>-Ss listen & repeat</b>
<b>-Take notes</b>
<b>-Ss look into the task </b>
<b>before listening </b>
<b>-Ss listen and share the </b>
<b>answers with a partner</b>
<b>-Ss answer</b>
<b>-Ss take notes</b>
<b>-Listening & guessing </b>
<b>them</b>
<b>-Ss work in individually, </b>
<b>listen and take note</b>
<b>- Listen carefully</b>
<b>-work in groups & compare </b>
<b>with friends</b>
<b>- Take note</b>
<b>2’</b>
<b>woman</b>
<b>FOOD </b> <b>%</b> <b>%</b>
<b>FARMWORK</b>
<b>%</b> <b>%</b>
<b>TIME BEGIN</b>
<b>%</b> <b>%</b>
<b>TIME FINISH</b>
<b>%</b>
<b>%</b>
<b>V/ Homework</b>
<b>- Learn by heart vob. & expression</b>
<b>-Practice listening again</b>
<b>-Prepare the writing</b>
<b>than?</b>
<b>-T asks Ss to do at home </b>
<b>with contents in home </b>
<b>work</b>
<b>-Compare who do </b>
<b>-Ss take notes</b>
<b>Unit 15:WOMEN IN SOCIETY</b>
<i><b>Lesson 4 :Writing</b></i>
<i>I Aims :</i>
<b> By the end of the lesson,the students will be able to write a report describing the </b>
<b>information shown in the column chart </b>
<i><b>II Skills: writing, reading, speaking </b></i>
<i><b>III Teaching aids: textbook, poster, pictures </b></i>
<i>Procedures :</i>
<b>Time</b> <b>Contents</b> <b>Teacher ‘s <sub>activities</sub></b> <b>Students’ac<sub>tivities</sub></b>
<b>5’</b>
<b>10 ‘</b>
<b>Warm up:jumpled word </b>
- <b>mairedr: married</b>
- <b>child baeirng : childbearing </b>
- <b>househlod : house hold </b>
- <b>nmuber : number </b>
<b> task 1</b>
<b> a Work in pairs: </b>
<b> - percentage of married men and married men</b>
- <b>roles of women and men in society </b>
- <b>housework hours per week </b>
<b>b answer the questions: </b>
<b>Keys: </b>
<b>1 In general, married women do more housework than men </b>
<b>do </b>
<b>2 They have to do less house work when they have more </b>
<b>children .</b>
<b>-T giveS the </b>
<b>rule of the </b>
<b>game</b>
<b>-T corrects</b>
<b>-T gives the </b>
<b>suggested </b>
<b>answers on the </b>
<b>board</b>
<b>T asks sts to </b>
<b>T elicits the </b>
<b>questions</b>
<b>Correcting the </b>
<b>answers </b>
<b>Group A-B</b>
<b>Play game</b>
<b>Individual </b>
<b>of each </b>
<b>group</b>
<b> gives right </b>
<b>word</b>
<b>ss work in </b>
<b>pairs </b>
<b>ss predict </b>
<b>& answer </b>
<b>the </b>
<b>15 ‘</b>
<b>14’</b>
<b>1’</b>
<b>3 Married men have to do less house work when they have </b>
<b>more children </b>
<b>4 Married men and women without children spend 20 and 30</b>
<b>hours on their housework per week respectively .</b>
<b>5 It takes men and women with one or two children 15 and </b>
<b>50 hours respectively to do their house work every week .</b>
<b>6 They are 10 and 55 </b>
<b>7 Married men should spend more time sharing the </b>
<b>housework with their wives .</b>
<b>II While –writing </b>
<b>Task 2 </b>
<b>Write a report describing the information shown in the </b>
<b>column chart in task 1 .begin your report </b>
<b> The column chart illustrates the average hours of </b>
<b>housework per week done by married women in comparison </b>
<b>with married men </b>
<b>III post –writing</b>
<b> Correction </b>
<b> Married women do more housework than men do </b>
<b> They have to do less house work when they have more </b>
<b>children </b>
<b> Married men have to do less house work when they have </b>
<b>more children </b>
<b> Married men and women without children spend 20 and 30 </b>
<b>hours on their housework per week respectively .</b>
<b> Talking roles of women </b>
<b>IV Home work </b>
<b>Write a correct report at home </b>
<b>Study language focus at home </b>
<b> </b>
<b>T asks sts to </b>
<b>work in group </b>
<b> corrects at </b>
<b>least 4 reports</b>
<b>T sugests some </b>
<b>sentences </b>
<b>T helps to talk </b>
<b>T asks sts to do</b>
<b>at home </b>
<b>Sts work in </b>
<b>group and </b>
<b>then go to </b>
<b>the board </b>
<b>write down </b>
<b>Ss note and </b>
<b>write down</b>
<b>Sts note</b>
<b>Sts retell</b>
<b>Ss must do </b>
<b>it at home </b>
<b>UNIT 15: WOMEN IN SOCIETY</b>
<i><b>LESSON 5: Language Focus</b></i>
<b>I .Aim: - By the end of the lesson, the students are able to use intonation in yes / no </b>
<b>question .</b>
- <b>By the end of the lesson, the students are able to use and make the </b>
<b>sentences with preposition </b>
<b> II .Skills: speaking, reading, writing </b>
<b>III. Grammar / Structure: verbs, preposition </b>
<b>IV.Teaching Aids: Textbook, posters, chalk and board.</b>
Procedures
<b> 3’</b>
<b>12’</b>
<b>10</b>
<b> </b>
<b>10’</b>
<b>9 ‘</b>
<b>1’</b>
<b>Warm up: </b>
<b>Matching column A with B </b>
<b>1 explain a to</b>
<b>2 ask b at</b>
<b>3 talk c about </b>
<b>4 glance d for </b>
<b>1 Intonation </b>
<b> Are you students ?</b>
<b> Yes, I’m </b>
<b>Practise reading the following sentences with </b>
<b>the rising tune </b>
<b>Work in pairs </b>
<b>Practise reading these conversations </b>
<b>1 and 2 </b>
<b>2 Grammar</b>
<b>Setting the sence </b>
<b> What does he do ? You look at him </b>
<b>verbs go with preposition </b>
<b>Ex 1 choose one of the following verbs + </b>
<b>the correct preposition page 170</b>
<b>Key :</b>
<b>1 glanced at 2 invited to </b>
<b>3 listen to 4 throw at </b>
<b>5 staring at 6 speaking </b>
<b>7 wrote to 8 point to </b>
<b>Ex 2: page 171 </b>
<b>Fill in each of the planks with an </b>
<b>appropriate preposition if necessary </b>
<b>Key: </b>
<b>1 for 2 for 3 to </b>
<b>4 for 5 about 6 ____</b>
<b>7 about 8 _____ 9 for </b>
<b>10 for </b>
<b>* complete the sentences with a proper </b>
<b>preposition </b>
<b>1 we wait ……. The bus </b>
<b>2 They live ………a small village </b>
<b>* Homework </b>
<b>- learn words verbs go with prepositions </b>
<b> - prepare unit 16 </b>
<b>-T writes on board</b>
<b>- T checks and gives </b>
<b>points</b>
<b>T asks ss to work </b>
<b>individually </b>
<b>T checks intonation</b>
<b>T divides into 6 group</b>
<b>and then goes around</b>
<b>to help </b>
<b>T sets the sence </b>
<b>What is it ? </b>
<b>underlined word </b>
<b>T asks ss to go to the </b>
<b>board </b>
<b> T Corrects form and </b>
<b>T asks ss to fill in the </b>
<b>blank </b>
<b>T corrects it </b>
<b>T sticks poster on the </b>
<b>board and asks ss to </b>
<b>fill preposition </b>
<b>T asks ss to do </b>
<b>-Sts guess and give </b>
<b>the answer</b>
<b>- Sts observe</b>
<b>St reads at least a </b>
<b>sentence </b>
<b>Ss work in group </b>
<b>and practise </b>
<b>reading </b>
<b>Ss look and predict</b>
<b>Ss write it on the </b>
<b>board </b>
<b>Ss write down on </b>
<b>Sts note</b>
<b>Fill preposition in </b>
<b>the gap </b>
<b>Ss must do at </b>
<b>home </b>
<b>UNIT 16: THE ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS</b>
<i><b>Lesson 1: READING</b></i>
<b>I. Aims: -By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know the Association of Southeast </b>
Asian Nations
-Know how to skim for main ideas
-Know how to scan for specific information
<b>II. Lexical items: Words and phrases about the Association of Southeast Asian Nations</b>
<b>III. Teaching aids: textbook, teacher’s book, posters, and pictures</b>
<b>IV. Procedure:</b>
<b>Time Content</b> <b>T’s activities</b> <b>STS’ activities</b>
3’
10’
23’
<b>I. Warm-Up</b>
Brain storming:
Southeast Asian countries
→Vietnam
→Thailand
→Laos
→
→
<b>II. Pre-reading</b>
<b>1. Pre-questions: Pairwork </b>
1. What does ASEAN stand for?
2. When did Vietnam join this association?
<b>2. Pre-teach vocabulary</b>
-to accelerate: to cause to move faster
→acceleration (n)
-to stabilize: làm ổn định
→stability (n)
→stable (adj)
-justice (n) sù c«ng b»ng
-diverse (adj) gồm nhiều loại khác nhau
-to forge
forgeability (n)
forgeable (adj)
-to integrate: hội nhËp, hoµ nhËp
→integration (n)
→integrative (adj)
-enterprise (n)
*Checking: R.O.R
<b>III. While-reading</b>
<b>1. Task 1: Fill in each blank with a suitable </b>
word
Keys:
1. justice 2. GDP 3. diverse 4. integration
5. accelerate 6. enterprises
<b>2. Task 2: Decide whether the following </b>
statements are true (T) or false (F)
Keys:
1. T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. F 6. F
Keys:
1. The five original member countries, namely,
Explain
Lead sts to the point
Ask questions before
sts read
Explanation
Translation
Translation
Translation
Translation
Translation
Explanation
Ask sts to fill in
the blanks by guessing
from the contexts
Ask sts to say T or F
and explain
Ask sts to play game
by choosing stars and
answering given
questions
Correct sts’ answers if
necessary
Play game
Answer questions
by guessing
Guess the meanings
of new words
Contribute what
they know to T’s
presentation
Work individually
Say T or F and
explain for their
choices
7’
2’
Indonesia, Malaysia, the Philippines, Singapore
and Thailand.
2. The two main goals of the Association are to
accelerate the economic growth, social progress
and cultural development; and to promote peace
and stability through respect for justice and the
rule of law in the relationship among countries
in the region.
3. It was about US$ 1405 billion.
4. It was adopted in 1998.
5. It includes trade, investment, industry,
services, finance, agriculture, rural
development, forestry, energy, transportation
and communication, science and technology,
small and medium enterprises, and tourism.
<b>IV. Post-reading</b>
Group work: summarise the passage, based on
the years: 1967, 1995, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2007,
2020
<b>V. Homework</b>
-Write a paragraph about what you like or
dislike about the Association of Southeast Asian
Nations
-Be ready for Section B: Speaking
Give comments to
encourage sts’
participation
Ask sts to summarise
the reading passage
Ask sts to speak up
Ask sts to work at
home
Work in groups
Choose 1
representative to
present
Individual work
<b>UNIT 16: THE ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS</b>
<i><b>LESSON 2: SPEAKING</b></i>
<b>I. OBJECTIVE:</b>
-By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to tell the name, the capital and the basic
information about the facts of the ASEAN countries.
<b>II. TEACHING AIDS:</b>
- Book, pictures, flags, posters…
<b>III. PROCEDURE:</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>content</b> <b>T’s actions</b> <b>Ss’ actions</b>
3’
8’
<b>A.WARMER:</b>
A group photo of the ASEAN leaders
<b>-Set the scene of the lesson</b>
<i><b>* VOCABULARY:</b></i>
- Buddhism ( n ): đạo Phật
- Catholicism ( n ): Thiên chúa giáo La Mã
- Christianity ( n ): đạo Cơ Đốc
- Islam ( n ): đạo hồi
- currency ( n ): tiền tệ
- Baht( n): đồng bạt( đơn vị tiền Th¸i Lan )
- Peso ( n ): đồng Pê-sô ( đơn vị tiền
Phi--show a group photo of
- Follow the steps
for presenting
vocabulary.
the photo of the
ASEAN leaders
- Listen & answer
- Repeat
8’
15’
lip- pin)
- Ringgit ( n ): đồng ring-git ( đơn vị tiền
Ma- lay-xia)
<b>B.PRE-SPEAKING:</b>
<i>Matching each national flag with the name </i>
<i>of the country and its capital.</i>
<b>FLAG -- COUNTRY /CAPITAL</b>
<b> </b>
1.VIETNAM A. Thailand
-Bangkok
2. MALAYSIA B. VIETNAM
- HANOI
3. THE PHILIPPINES C.Malaysia
- Kuala Lumpur
4.THAILAND D. The Philippines
- Manila
5.SINGAPORE E. Laos
- Vientiane
6.INDONESIA F.Indonesia
- Jakarta
7.BRUNEI G.Singapore
- Singapore
8.LAOS H. Cambodia
- Phnom Penh
9.CAMBODIA I. Myanmar
- Naypyidaw
10.MYANMAR J- Brunei
- Bandar Seri
Begawan
<b>C. WHILE-SPEAKING:</b>
-Work in group: Discuss and use the
information in task 1 and facts below to ask
<b>MALAYSIA</b>
Area: 330,252 sq. km
Population: 27,174,000
Official language(s): Malay, English, Tamil
Religion(s): Islam, Buddhism
Currency: Ringgit
(Malaysian dollar)
<b>PHILIPPINES</b>
Area: 300,000 sq. km
Population: 88,875,000
Official language(s): Filipino, English
Religion(s): Christianity
( mostly Roman Catholic)
Currency: Peso
- Check ROR
- Ask ss to match
each national flag
with the name of
the country and its
capital
- Correct
- Match
1’
<b>THAILAND</b>
Area: 513,120 sq. km
Population: 65,694,000
Official language(s): Thai
Religion(s): Buddhism
Currency: Baht
<b>SINGAPORE</b>
Area: 704 sq. km
Population: 4,589,000
Official language(s): Malay, English, Tamil,
Chinese
Religion(s): Islam, Buddhism, Hinduism,
Christianity
Currency: Singapore dollar
<b>D.POST-SPEAKING:</b>
<i>Talk about one of the ASEAN countries.</i>
Malaysia has a total area of 330,252 sq. km.
Its capital is Kuala Lumpur. It has a population
of 27,174,000. The official languages used in
Malaysia are Malay, English and
Tamil………
<b>E. HOMEWORK: </b>
- Ask ss to work in
group and make
questions and
answer about some
of the ASEAN
countries.
- Correct
- QUESTIONS:
1. What’s a total area of
Malaysia?
2. What’s its capital?
3. What’ its population?
4. What’s the official
5. What’s the main
religion in Malaysia?
6. What’s the currency
unit used in Malaysia?
Ask ss to talk about
one of the ASEAN
countries on bb
-Work in group
-Make questions
and answer in pairs
ANSWERS
-Malaysia has a
total area of
330,252 sq.km
-Its capital is Kuala
Lumpur
-It has a population
of 27.174,000
- The official
languages used in
Malaysia are
Malay, English and
Tamil.
-The main religions
in Malaysia are
Islam, Buddhism.
-Ringgit is local
currency in
Malaysia.
Talk about one of
the ASEAN
countries
<b>UNIT 16: THE ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS</b>
<i>Lesson 3: Listening</i>
<b>I. Objectives: by the end of the lesson, students are able to know more about the using of </b>
English and religions in ASEAN nations.
<b>II. Language content: vocabulary on religions</b>
<b>III. Teaching aids:</b>
<b>IV. Stages: </b>
<b>Time Content</b> <b>Teacher’s activities</b> <b>Sts’ Activities</b>
<b>1. Warmer: Brainstorming</b>
Vietnam
laos
- Asking sts to play the
- Checking
- Playing the game
in groups
* Key: Vietnam, Laos, Cambodia, Thailand,
Philipines, Malaysia, Indonesia, Singapore,
Brunei, Myanmar.
<b>2. Activities:</b>
<b>* Activity 1: Pick out the countries in which </b>
English is used as the second language:
Vietnam, Laos, Cambodia, England, The
USA, Thailand, Philipines, Malaysia,
Indonesia, Singapore, Brunei, Myanmar.
Key:
<b>* Activity 2: Listen to the tape and write out </b>
religions mentioned in the dialouge
Key:
Buddhism, Islam, Catholicism
<b>* Activity 3: Listen to the tape and choose </b>
the best answer A, B or C to complete each
sentence
1. Nga asked her father about_______
A. the English language spoken in the US.
B. people who speak English in the UK.
C.The number of people who speak
English in the ASEAN countries.
2.The ASEAN countries include______
A. about a quarter of a billion Muslims.
B. 25 million Muslims.
C. half a billion Muslims.
3. Muslims mostly live in ________
A. the Philipines.
B. Indonesia and Myanmar.
C. Indonesia and Malaysia.
4. The main religion in Vietnam is
__________
A. Buddhism.
B. Islam.
C. Catholicism.
5. Mr Hung thought that __________
A. he himself would wake up late the next
morning.
B. Nga would get up late the next morning.
C. both of them would wake up late the
Key:
1 2 3 4 5
C A C A B
<b>*Activity 4: Listen to the tape again and </b>
answer the questions:
- Making handouts and
asking sts to complete
the task
- Playing the tape,
asking sts to call out the
religions they hear.
- Giving the correct
answers
- Playing the tape 3
times.
- Asking sts to look at
their book and listen to
the tape.
- Asking Sts to share
the answers to a
- Checking
- Giving the answers.
- Playing the tape
sentence by sentence.
- Looking at
handouts and
discuss with a
partner.
- Giving the
answers
- Listenning to the
tape
- Write out the
religions
- Giving the
answers
- Looking at the
book and
listenning to the
tape
- Choosing the best
- Sharing with a
partner.
- Giving the
correct answer
Philipines, Malaysia,
1. When will Nga sudmit the essay to her
teacher?
2. What country has the large number of
English speakers?
3. How many people speak English in the
ASEAN region?
4. Is English mostly spoken in Philipines?
Key:
1. Tomorrow( the next day)
2. The US.
3. Around 50 million.
4. Yes, it is.
<b>* Activity 5: Listing religions in Vietnam:</b>
Key: Buddhism, cao dai, Phat giao Hoa hao,
<b>3. Homework: summarize the content of the </b>
dialogue between Nga and Mr Hung
- Asking Sts to work in
groups.
- Checking the answer
- Asking sts to work in
groups
- Giving homework
- Listenning to the
tape
- Discussing with
friendsin groups.
- Answering the
questions
- Telling the class
<b>Unit 16 : THE ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS</b>
<b>Lesson 4: Writing</b>
<b>I. Aims: By the end of the lesson, sts can know how to write a letter of recommendation. </b>
<b>II. Teaching aids: charts, pictures, …</b>
<b>III. Procedures:</b>
<b>Time</b> <b>Content</b> <b>T’ activities</b> <b>Sts’ </b>
<b>activities</b>
<i><b>I. WARM UP: Matching</b></i>
1. a. Ha Long bay
2. b. Da Lat
3. c. Thien Mu pagoda
4. d. Nha Trang city
- pick the
pictures up on
the board
- set the scene
5. e. Trang Tien bridge
6. f. The beach of Vung Tau
7. g. Van Mieu
Keys: 1b 2c 3d 4g 5f 6e 7a
<b>II. PRE WRITING</b>
1. Complete the letter of recommendation
with the missing sentences in the box. (
Task 1 – p.180)
2. Outline
Date
Salutation
Body:
- location
- natural features
- entertainment
- places to visit
- food
- people
- ……….
Closing
Signature
<b>III. WHILE WRITING</b>
David, your pen pal, is going to spend his
Summer vacation in one of the ASEAN
countries. You want him to visit Vietnam. Write
a letter to him recommending a significant place
you are familiar with. Use the outline above.
<b>IV. POST WRITING</b>
Correction
<b>V. HOMEWORK</b>
Rewrite the letter.
Prepare LANGUAGE FOCUS.
- ask sts to
read the letter
and complete
- correct
- ask sts to
think of a
significant
place they are
familiar with
and write an
outline
- ask sts to
write their
writing
individually
- go around to
help sts if
necessary
- ask sts to
- correct
- read and
do the task
- correct
- think of a
significant
place
- write an
outline
- write a
letter
- change the
paper
- correct
- give the task
<i><b>UNIT 16:</b></i> <i><b>THE ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS </b></i>
Lesson 5: Language Focus
<b>I. AIM: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know about the rising – falling </b>
tone and the usage of tenses in the adverbial clause of time.
<b>II. LEXICAL ITEMS:</b>
<b>III.TEACHING AIDS: textbooks, handouts, drill cues</b>
<b>V. PROCEDURES:</b>
<b>Tim</b>
<b>e</b> <b>Stages & contents</b> <b>T ’s activities</b> <b>Sts’ activities</b>
3’
5’
13’
<b>I. Pronunciation: </b>
<b>1.Picture: </b>
<i> Guessing the words through picture</i>
<i> </i>
IS IT FALL OR SPRING?
How can I speak this? Notice my voice, my intonation.
<b>2. Practice: (tape recorder) </b>
<i> Listen and repeat:</i>
1. Do you live in a house or in a flat?
2. Is Jane a teacher or a student?
3. Would you like some tea or coffee?
4. Is the baby a boy or a girl?
5. Shall we go by bus or by train?
6. Is today Tuesday or Wednesday?
7. Are you coming or not?
8. Is your sister older or younger than you?
9. Do you want to have lunch now or wait till later?
10. Did Italy or Brazil win the World Cup?
<i><b> II. Grammar:</b></i>
<b>1. Presentation:</b>
<b>MAIN CLAUSE</b> <b>ADVERBIAL CLAUSE</b>
<b>OF TIME</b>
<b>1. He was sitting on the </b>
beach
<b>2. The train had gone </b>
<b>3. Remember to ask for </b>
permission
<b>4. I have answered all </b>
<b>a. until she went to </b>
Tokyo last month.
<b>b. as soon as we have </b>
finished this course in
Boston University.
<b>c. when he heard a noise </b>
- present two
sounds
- guide Ss to
play the game
- control the
class
- lead to the
new lesson
- write the title
- play the tape
recorder
- ask sts to work
in pairs
- ask sts to
match the table
- present the
structure
- listen and
answer
- listen
- take part in
the game
listen & write
the title
- listen and
repeat
- pair works
15’
5’
of the questions
correctly
<b>5. She had never had a </b>
chance to use her
Japanese
<b>6. We can speak French</b>
well
<b>7. Don’t go anywhere</b>
<b>8. Tom was playing </b>
<b>d. as soon as his parents </b>
went home.
<b>e. before you light up a </b>
cigarette
<b>f. since I began this </b>
grammar exercise on
verb tenses
<b>g. till your parents come </b>
here
<b>h. by the time we arrived</b>
<i>Key: 1c 2h 3e 4f 5a 6b 7g 8d</i>
<i>Form: </i>
<b>MỆNH ĐỀ </b>
<b>CHÍNH</b> <b>MĐ TRẠNG TỪ CHỈ THỜI GIAN</b>
1.Simple present
Present perfect
<i>(since)</i>
<i>- Simple present (thói quen)</i>
<i>hđ </i>
<i>dang xảy ra)</i>
<i>- Persent perfect ( nhấn mạnh hđ </i>
<i>hoàn tất)</i>
- Simple past
2. Future
- am/ is/ are
going to + Vo
- will/ shall +
Vo
- will have V3/
ed
- Simple present
<i>- Persent perfect ( hđ hoàn tất)</i>
3. Simple Past
Past
continuous
Past perfect
<i>- Simple Past ( thói quen)</i>
<i>- Past continuous (hđ đang xảy ra </i>
<i>ở qk)</i>
- Past perfect
- Simple Past
- Past continuous
- Simple Past
<b>a. Khơng sử dụng thì tương lai trong mệnh đề trạng từ </b>
<b>chỉ thời gian.</b>
<b>b. MĐ TT chỉ thời gian được bắt đầu bằng các liên từ:</b>
when whenever before after
since as as soon as while
till/ until just as no sooner ...than
hardly ...when as long as
<b>2. Practice:</b>
<i><b>Exercise 1: Complete each of the following sentences, </b></i>
<i><b>using a suitable adverbial clause of time in the box.</b></i>
<i><b>(p.182)</b></i>
Keys:
1. She’ll phone you as soon as she arrives in Ho Chi
Minh city.
2. After the war was over, we started rebuilding the
- ask sts for
concept check,
give the form
then
- ask St to do
tasks
- go around for
helping
- correct
- ask sts to do
the exercises on
textbook
- ask sts to
compare with
friends
- correct
- answer
- work
individually.
- compare with
friend.
- listen and take
notes
- pair works
2’ country.
3. They met a lot of people while they were on
holiday.
4. Before you leave, don’t forget to turn off the
flights.
5. I’ll stay till you get back.
6. We’ll come to see you whenever we are in Hanoi.
7. There is a danger of war as long as imperialism
exists.
8. Tom sang a merry song as he walked away.
<i><b>Exercise 2: Supply the correct tense form of the verbs in </b></i>
Keys:
1. arrives 2. arrives 3. are playing 4.
got
5. have finished 6. (had) graduated 7. am 8.
have read
<i><b>Exercise 3 :Combine two sentences, using one as an </b></i>
<i><b>adverbial clause of time with the given conjunction .</b></i>
<i><b>(p.184)</b></i>
Keys:
1. Let’s go out before it starts raining.
2. I’ll give you my address when I have found
somewhere to live.
3. After he had done his homework, he went to bed.
4. We’ll let you know as soon as we have made our
decision.
5. I haven’t met them since I left school.
6. Robert suddenly began to feel ill while he was
doing the examination.
7. Kate will come back home after she has finish the
last semester.
<b>3. Production: </b>
<i>Make sentences from pictures</i>
<i> </i>
<b>V. Homework:</b>
<i> - Learn by heart new language</i>
- ask St to
complete the
sentences
<i>- check: “buy </i>
<i>the sentence”</i>
- ask Ss to
make sentences
from the
pictures
- read, take
notes & give
feedback
- give the tasks
- do as directed
-listen and take
part in the game
- do as directed
- work
individually
- compare with
friends
- listen and take
notes